Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

WO2022132887A1 - Human monoclonal antibodies targeting the sars-cov-2 spike protein - Google Patents

Human monoclonal antibodies targeting the sars-cov-2 spike protein Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022132887A1
WO2022132887A1 PCT/US2021/063493 US2021063493W WO2022132887A1 WO 2022132887 A1 WO2022132887 A1 WO 2022132887A1 US 2021063493 W US2021063493 W US 2021063493W WO 2022132887 A1 WO2022132887 A1 WO 2022132887A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
antibody
cov
sars
antibodies
antibody fragment
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2021/063493
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Jimmy Dale GOLLIHAR
Gregory C. IPPOLITO
Jason J. LAVINDER
George Georgiou
Jason S. Mclellan
William N. VOSS
Original Assignee
Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System filed Critical Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System
Publication of WO2022132887A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022132887A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • A61P31/14Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/08Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from viruses
    • C07K16/10Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from viruses from RNA viruses
    • C07K16/1002Coronaviridae
    • C07K16/1003Severe acute respiratory syndrome coronavirus 2 [SARS‐CoV‐2 or Covid-19]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/505Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies comprising antibodies
    • A61K2039/507Comprising a combination of two or more separate antibodies
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/20Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by taxonomic origin
    • C07K2317/21Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by taxonomic origin from primates, e.g. man
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/70Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by effect upon binding to a cell or to an antigen
    • C07K2317/76Antagonist effect on antigen, e.g. neutralization or inhibition of binding
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/90Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by (pharmaco)kinetic aspects or by stability of the immunoglobulin
    • C07K2317/92Affinity (KD), association rate (Ka), dissociation rate (Kd) or EC50 value

Definitions

  • the present invention relates generally to the fields of medicine, immunology, and virology. More particularly, it concerns human antibodies that bind the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein and methods of their use.
  • SARS-CoV-2 the causative agent of the COVID- 19 pandemic, has spread to every continent except for Antarctica.
  • the spike (S) surface glycoprotein is the primary antigenic target for the majority of vaccines and monoclonal antibodies (mAbs) currently under development or in clinical trials worldwide (Corbett et al., 2020; Yang et al., 2020; Folegatti et al., 2020; Mulligan et al., 2020).
  • S-ECD The S ectodomain (S-ECD) folds into a multidomain architecture (Wrapp et al., 2020; Walls et al., 2020) and includes the ACE2 receptor binding domain (RBD), which is essential for viral infectivity, and the structurally adjacent N-terminal domain (NTD), the function of which is currently unclear.
  • RBD ACE2 receptor binding domain
  • NTD structurally adjacent N-terminal domain
  • MAbs targeting the spike have been isolated predominately by single B-cell cloning followed by screening for binding and neutralization in vitro (Robbiani et al., 2020; Ju et al., 2020; Brouwer et al., 2020; Zost et al., 2020; Cao et al., 2020; Rogers et al., 2020; Shi et al., 2020; Wee et al., 2020; Hansen et al., 2020). These studies have revealed B-cell recognition of multiple spike epitopes and have led to the discovery of potent antibodies targeting the RBD.
  • the epitopes targeted by the circulating antibodies in convalescent individuals have not been reported.
  • serological assays of COVID-19 plasma have demonstrated that the IgG plasma antibody repertoire, like the B-cell repertoire, can recognize multiple spike epitopes (Ripperger et al., 2020; Piccoli et al., 2020; Weisblum et al., 2020; Juno et al., 2020), the clonal diversity and temporal dynamics of the two repertoires are divergent (Lavinder et al., 2015; Lavinder et al., 2014; Purtha et al., 2011; Smith et al., 1997).
  • antibodies or antibody fragments comprising clone-paired heavy and light chain CDR sequences derived from the clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences of Table 2.
  • the antibodies or antibody fragments comprise clone-paired heavy and light chain CDR sequences from Table 1.
  • the antibodies or antibody fragments comprise clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences having, independently, at least 70%, 80%, or 90% identity to sequences from Table 2.
  • the antibodies or antibody fragments comprise clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences each having at least 95% identity to sequences from Table 2.
  • the antibodies or antibody fragments comprises clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences from Table 2.
  • the antibody fragments are recombinant scFv (single chain fragment variable) antibodies, Fab fragments, F(ab')2 fragments, or Fv fragments.
  • the antibodies are chimeric antibodies or bispecific antibodies.
  • the antibodies are capable of binding to SARS-CoV-2 spike protein.
  • the antibodies are IgG antibodies or recombinant IgG antibodies or antibody fragments.
  • the antibodies or antibody fragments are fused to an imaging agent.
  • the antibodies or antibody fragments are labeled with, for example, a fluorescent label, an enzymatic label, or a radioactive label.
  • monoclonal antibodies or antibody fragments which compete for binding to the same epitope as a monoclonal antibody or an antibody fragment having clone-paired heavy and light chain CDR sequences from Table 1 or clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences from Table 2.
  • monoclonal antibodies or antibody fragments that bind to an epitope on SARS-CoV-2 spike protein recognized by a monoclonal antibody or an antibody fragment having clone-paired heavy and light chain CDR sequences from Table 1 or clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences from Table 2.
  • nucleic acids encoding the antibody heavy and/or light chain variable region of the antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments.
  • the nucleic acid is part of an expression vector.
  • nuclei acid is in a hybridoma or engineered cell.
  • kits for making the monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments comprising culturing the hybridoma or engineered cell of the present embodiments under conditions that allow expression of the antibody or antibody fragment and optionally isolating the antibody or antibody fragment from the culture.
  • compositions comprising one or more antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments.
  • pharmaceutical formulations comprising one or more expression vector encoding a first antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments.
  • the pharmaceutical formulation comprises one or more expression vector encoding a second antibody or antibody fragment, such as a distinct antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments.
  • kits for reducing the likelihood of a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, infection in a patient at risk of contracting a betacoronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2 comprising delivering to the patient an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments.
  • the methods are further characterized as methods of preventing a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, infection in the patient.
  • the patient has been exposed to a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2.
  • the antibody or antibody fragment is delivered to the patient prior to infection or after infection.
  • delivering comprises antibody or antibody fragment administration, or genetic delivery with an RNA or DNA sequence or vector encoding the antibody or antibody fragment.
  • kits for treating a patient infected with a beta-coronavirus infection comprising delivering to the patient an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments.
  • the methods comprise delivering to the patient a cocktail of antibodies or antibody fragments selected from among the antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments.
  • the cocktail comprises the CM29 antibody, the CM30 antibody, and the CM32 antibody.
  • the cocktail is about 50% CM29, about 20% CM30, and about 20% CM32.
  • delivering comprises antibody or antibody fragment administration, or genetic delivery with an RNA or DNA sequence or vector encoding the antibody or antibody fragment.
  • the methods reduce the viral load in the patient.
  • a betacoronavirus infection e.g., a SARS-CoV-2 infection
  • the methods comprising: (a) contacting a sample obtained from the patient with an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments; and (b) detecting the beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS- CoV-2, in the sample by detecting binding of the antibody or antibody fragment to a betacoronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, antigen in the sample.
  • the sample is a body fluid.
  • the sample is blood, sputum, tears, saliva, mucous or serum, semen, cervical or vaginal secretions, amniotic fluid, placental tissues, urine, exudate, transudate, tissue scrapings or feces.
  • detecting comprises an ELISA, RIA, lateral flow assay or Western blot.
  • the methods further comprise performing steps (a) and (b) a second time and determining a change in beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, antigen levels as compared to the first assay.
  • beta-coronavirus e.g., SARS-CoV-2
  • kits for determining a severity of a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, infection in a patient comprising performing an assay to determine an anti-SARS-CoV-2 spike protein N-terminal domain (NTD) antibody titer in a blood, plasma, or serum sample from the patient and correlating the severity of the infection based on the NTD antibody titer.
  • NTD N-terminal domain
  • a higher NTD antibody titer indicates a heightened immune response, and thus a less severe infection.
  • the assay comprises contacting the blood, plasma, or serum sample with a SARS-CoV-2 NTD.
  • the methods further comprise detecting a level of binding of the NTD titer to the SARS-CoV-2 NTD.
  • the titer is determined by performing an ELISA assay.
  • the titer is determined using a microneutralization assay to detect the presence of neutralizing antibodies.
  • the antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments is used as a positive control in the assay.
  • kits for predicting a neutralization activity of blood, plasma, or serum sample from a patient infected with SARS-CoV-2 comprising performing an assay to determine an anti-SARS-CoV-2 spike protein N- terminal domain (NTD) antibody titer in the blood, plasma, or serum sample and predicting the neutralization activity of the sample based on the NTD antibody titer.
  • NTD spike protein N- terminal domain
  • a higher NTD antibody titer indicates a higher neutralization activity.
  • the assay comprises contacting the blood, plasma, or serum sample with a SARS-CoV-2 NTD.
  • the methods further comprise detecting a level of binding of the NTD titer to the SARS-CoV-2 NTD.
  • the titer is determined by performing an ELISA assay.
  • the antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments is used as a positive control in the assay.
  • AVx n G motif in CDR-H3 is an AVAG motif.
  • kits for preparing a pharmaceutical formulation comprising a cocktail of antibodies or antibody fragments that bind to a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, spike protein
  • the methods comprising (i) identifying and quantifying the anti-beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, spike protein antibodies present in a blood, plasma, or serum sample from a patient infected with betacoronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2; (ii) determining the ratio at which each of the identified antibodies was present in the sample; and (iii) preparing a pharmaceutical formulation comprising the identified antibodies at the determined ratio.
  • step (i) comprises performing affinity chromatography to enrich IgG antibodies in the sample that bind to a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, spike protein.
  • a beta-coronavirus e.g., SARS-CoV-2
  • spike protein extracellular domain is used as the ligand.
  • the beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, spike protein receptor binding domain is used as the ligand.
  • step (i) comprises LC-MS/MS antibody profiling (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. 9,146,241).
  • provided herein are pharmaceutical formulations prepared by the method of any one of the foregoing embodiments.
  • determining an antigenic integrity, correct conformation and/or correct sequence of a beta-coronavirus e.g., SARS- CoV-2, antigen
  • the method comprising: (a) contacting a sample comprising the antigen with a first antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments; and (b) determining antigenic integrity, correct conformation and/or correct sequence of the antigen by detecting binding of the first antibody or antibody fragment to the antigen.
  • the sample comprises a recombinantly produced antigen.
  • the sample comprises a vaccine formulation comprising the antigen.
  • detecting comprises an ELISA, RIA, lateral flow assay or Western blot.
  • the methods further comprise performing steps (a) and (b) a second time to determine the antigenic stability of the antigen over time.
  • methods of detecting betacoronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, spike protein in an in vitro sample comprising contacting the in vitro sample with an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments and detecting the binding of the antibody or antibody fragment to the sample.
  • the detecting is by flow cytometry, mass spectrometry, western blot, immunohistochemistry, ELISA, or RIA.
  • antibodies or antibody fragments of any one of the present embodiments or pharmaceutical formulations comprising said antibodies or antibody fragments for use in treating or preventing a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, infection in a patient.
  • a beta-coronavirus e.g., SARS-CoV-2
  • an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments or pharmaceutical formulations comprising said antibodies or antibody fragments in the manufacture of a medicament for treating or preventing a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, infection in a patient.
  • a beta-coronavirus e.g., SARS-CoV-2
  • FIGS. 1A-G A single spike NTD-targeting IgG antibody in plasma can confer protection without a need for RBD-directed activity.
  • FIG. 1A Polyclonal IgG plasma antibodies were affinity purified using stabilized spike S-2P S-ECD (Wrapp et al., 2020) or RBD, and binding specificity was mapped using purified S subdomains; anti-RBD (green); anti-S2 (blue); anti-NTD (red).
  • FIG. 1C Quantitative determination of plasma RBD and non-RBD antibody abundance in early convalescence. Abundance normalized to the entire S-ECD plasma IgG repertoire.
  • FIG. ID Composition, binding specificity and relative abundance of antibodies in early convalescent plasma (study subject P3).
  • CM29, CM30, CM31, CM32 Authentic virus neutralization of the four topmost abundant plasma IgGs (CM29, CM30, CM31, CM32) from plasma lineages Lin.l, Lin.2, Lin.3, Lin.4 in FIG. ID that account for >90% of the plasma anti-S-ECD repertoire.
  • the three lines that cross the 50% neutralization line represent, from left to right, CM30, CM32, and CM29.
  • FIG. 1F&G Prophylactic protection of 12 m.o. BALB/C mice against lethal challenge with 10 4 PFU mouse-adapted (MAIO) SARS-CoV-2 using 200pg/mouse of non-RBD mAbs CM29, CM30, and CM31.
  • Antibody cocktail 200 pg/mouse
  • FIGS. 2A-F Protective spike NTD-targeting antibodies are prevalent in the plasma of convalescent COVID-19 study subjects.
  • FIG. 2A Temporal dynamics of the plasma anti-S-ECD IgG repertoire at days 12 and 56 post-symptom onset.
  • FIG. 2B Biolayer interferometry binding sensorgrams to S-ECD ligand of anti-NTD mAbs CM17 and CM25 (subject P2) and CM58 (subject P4).
  • FIG. 2C In vitro live virus neutralization.
  • FIGS. 2D-F Prophylactic protection of 12 m.o.
  • FIGS. 3A-D Genetic basis of a shared, or public, class of IGHV1-24 plasma antibodies targeting the spike NTD.
  • RSV respiratory syncytial virus
  • TIV trivalent influenza vaccine hemagglutinin HA1
  • Heatmap shows recombinant mAb affinity (KD) and live virus neutralization (IC50) of the IGHV1-24 anti-NTD public class of antibodies.
  • the sequence labeled IGHVL24 is SEQ ID NO: 62.
  • FIG. 3D Competitive biolayer interferometry binding assay (“checkboard competition”) of NTD-binding mAbs found in this study (CM17, CM25, CM58, CM30, and CM31) and others (4A8 and 1-68).
  • RBD-binding mAbs CM32 and CR3022 included for comparison. Numbers refer to the shift, in nanometers, after second mAb binding to the preformed mAb-NTD complex.
  • FIGS. 4A-D Structural basis of a shared, or public, class of IGHV1-24 plasma antibodies targeting the spike NTD.
  • FIG. 4A Cryo-EM structure of CM25 bound to S-ECD at an overall resolution of 3.3 A.
  • FIG. 4B The VH domain dominants the mode of binding, with substantial contacts mediated by interactions between the three CDRs and the N3 and N5 loops of the NTD.
  • FIG. 4C CDR-H1 interaction includes a salt bridge formed between the conserved Glu36 residue and the N5 loop residue Arg246.
  • the IGHV1-24 Phe56 residue in CDR-H2 forms a pi-cation interaction with Lysl47 in the N3 loop.
  • FIG. 4D The AV dipeptide interaction is structurally conserved between CM25 and 4A8. Both structures show extensive contacts with the N3 and N5 loops of the NTD. Ala 109 and Vail 10 are buried at the interface in a binding pocket framed by the N3 and N5 loops. Notably, Glu36 - Arg246 salt bridge and an identical CDR-H2 contact between Phe56 and Lysl47 are also observed at the 4A8-NTD interface.
  • FIG. 5 Live virus neutralization titers of four COVID+ study subjects’ plasms at each collection time point. Serial dilutions of plasms were tested in duplicate (SD error bars) for inhibition of live SARS-CoV-2 virus infection of in vitro monolayered Vero E6 cells. The percent of infected Vero E6 cells in each sample dilution was normalized relative to the virus-only (no plasms) negative control sample. At 60% relative infection, the lines represent, from left to right, P3 day 11, Pl day 12, Pl day 56, P2 day 56, P2 day 12, P4 day 45, and P4 day 19.
  • FIGS. 6A-C Ig-seq plasma Igg lineage profiles of study subjects at early and late convalescent time points.
  • FIG. 6 A Donor Pl.
  • FIG. 6B Donor P2.
  • FIG. 6C Donor P4.
  • the first time point Ig-seq profile days 11-19 for each subject (subject P3 found in FIG. 1) shows both the SARS-CoV-2 spike ECD (S-ECD) and RBD abundance for each plasma IgG lineage detected at >0.5% anti-S-ECD plasma IgG (summed lineage XIC).
  • FIG. 7. Ig-seq intra-lineage diversification in study subject P3 at day 11.
  • the top two plasma IgG lineages from subject P3 demonstrate a large number of LC-MS/MS identified unique CDR-H3 clones within each lineage (33 total unique CDR-H3 clones in top two IgG lineages combined). This indicates extensive ongoing diversification within this donor at early convalescence.
  • FIG. 8 ADCP ECD-bead assay using recombinant plasma IgG mAbs.
  • the phagocytosis index metric represents the percent of bead-positive THP-1 cells multiplied by the average MFI of each cell to account for increased levels of bead internalization.
  • the lines represent, from top to bottom, CM32, CM17, CM25, CM29, CM58, CM30, and CR3022.
  • FIGS. 9A-B In vivo protection against SARS-CoV-2 viral challenge using recombinant plasma IgG mAbs.
  • FIG. 9A Day four lung viral titers and average cohort weight loss of 12 m.o. BALB/C mice after intranasal challenge with 10 3 PFU of mouse- adapted (MAIO) SARS-CoV-2. 200 ug of mAb was administered 12 hours prior to challenge.
  • FIG. 9B Averaged cohort survival across four days post-challenge in the high dose challenge of MAIO (10 4 PFU/mouse).
  • FIG. 10 Independent live virus neutralization titers of recombinant plasma IgG mAbs CM17, CM25, and CM32.
  • IgG mAbs CM17, CM25, and CM32 In vitro live virus neutralization curves for CM17, CM25, and CM32 repeated in second independent laboratory demonstrate similar levels of inhibition (as compared to data in FIGS. IE and 2C) of live SARS-CoV-2 vims infection of monolayered Vero E6 cells. The percent of infected Vero E6 cells in each sample dilution was normalized relative to the virus-only (no plasma) negative control sample.
  • human monoclonal antibodies reactive with the spike protein of SARS-CoV-2, the causative agent of COVID-19. These monoclonal antibodies react variously with the receptor binding domain (RBD), the N-terminal domain (NTD), or the S2 subunit (S2). These monoclonal antibodies can be used as diagnostics, prophylactics, or therapeutics for the monitoring, containment, or treatment, respectively, of SARS-CoV-2 infections.
  • RBD receptor binding domain
  • NTD N-terminal domain
  • S2 subunit S2 subunit
  • IgG immunoglobulin G
  • essentially free in terms of a specified component, is used herein to mean that none of the specified component has been purposefully formulated into a composition and/or is present only as a contaminant or in trace amounts.
  • the total amount of the specified component resulting from any unintended contamination of a composition is therefore well below 0.05%, preferably below 0.01%.
  • Most preferred is a composition in which no amount of the specified component can be detected with standard analytical methods.
  • Nucleic acid means at least two nucleotides, either deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, or analogs thereof, covalently linked together.
  • Polynucleotides are polymers of any length, including, e.g., 20, 50, 100, 200, 300, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 5000, 7000, 10,000, etc.
  • a polynucleotide described herein generally contains phosphodiester bonds, although in some cases, nucleic acid analogs are included that may have at least one different linkage, e.g.
  • polynucleotides a gene or gene fragment, exons, introns, messenger RNA (mRNA), transfer RNA, ribosomal RNA, ribozymes, cDNA, cRNA, recombinant polynucleotides, branched polynucleotides, plasmids, vectors, isolated DNA of any sequence, isolated RNA of any sequence, nucleic acid probes, and primers.
  • a polynucleotide may comprise modified nucleotides, such as methylated nucleotides and nucleotide analogs. If present, modifications to the nucleotide structure may be imparted before or after assembly of the polymer.
  • sequence of nucleotides may be interrupted by non-nucleotide components.
  • a polynucleotide may be further modified after polymerization, such as by conjugation with a labeling component.
  • the term also includes both double- and single-stranded molecules. Unless otherwise specified or required, the term polynucleotide encompasses both the double-stranded form and each of two complementary single-stranded forms known or predicted to make up the double-stranded form.
  • a polynucleotide is composed of a specific sequence of four nucleotide bases: adenine (A), cytosine (C), guanine (G), thymine (T), and uracil (U) for thymine when the polynucleotide is RNA.
  • polynucleotide sequence is the alphabetical representation of a polynucleotide molecule.
  • a particular polynucleotide sequence also implicitly encompasses conservatively modified variants thereof (e.g., degenerate codon substitutions) and complementary sequences as well as the sequence explicitly indicated.
  • degenerate codon substitutions may be achieved by generating sequences in which the third position of one or more selected (or all) codons is substituted with mixed-base and/or deoxyinosine residues.
  • peptide refers to polymers of amino acid residues. These terms also apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residues is an artificial chemical mimetic of a corresponding naturally occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally occurring amino acid polymers, those containing modified residues, and non- naturally occurring amino acid polymers.
  • polypeptide encompasses an antibody or a fragment thereof.
  • human monoclonal antibodies having clone-paired CDRs from the heavy and light chains as illustrated in Table 1 as well as clone-paired variable regions as illustrated in Table 2. Such antibodies may be produced using methods described herein.
  • the monoclonal antibodies of the present invention have several applications, including the production of diagnostic kits for use in detecting and diagnosing SARS-CoV-2 infection, as well as for treating or preventing SARS-CoV-2 infections in patients.
  • the S2- directed antibody CM29 cross-reacts with the beta-coronaviruses OC43 and HKU1.
  • the monoclonal antibodies of the present invention can be used to detect, diagnose, treat, or prevent a beta-coronavirus infection.
  • the antibodies may be mutated or modified, as discussed further below. Methods for preparing and characterizing antibodies are well known in the art (see, e.g., Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, 1988; U.S. Patent 4,196,265).
  • an “antibody” is an immunoglobulin molecule capable of specific binding to a target, such as a carbohydrate, polynucleotide, lipid, polypeptide, etc., through at least one antigen recognition site, located in the variable region of the immunoglobulin molecule.
  • the term encompasses not only intact polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies, but also fragments thereof (such as Fab, Fab', F(ab')2, Fv, Fd, Fd', single chain antibody (ScFv), diabody, linear antibody), mutants thereof, naturally occurring variants, fusion proteins comprising an antibody portion with an antigen recognition site of the required specificity, chimeric antibodies, and any other modified configuration of the immunoglobulin molecule that comprises an antigen recognition site of the required specificity.
  • fragments thereof such as Fab, Fab', F(ab')2, Fv, Fd, Fd', single chain antibody (ScFv), diabody, linear antibody
  • an “isolated antibody” is one that has been separated and/or recovered from a component of its natural environment. Contaminant components of its natural environment are materials that would interfere with diagnostic or therapeutic uses for the antibody, and may include enzymes, hormones, and other proteinaceous or non-proteinaceous solutes.
  • the antibody is purified: (1) to greater than 95% by weight of antibody as determined by the Lowry method, and most particularly more than 99% by weight; (2) to a degree sufficient to obtain at least 15 residues of N-terminal or internal amino acid sequence by use of a spinning cup sequenator; or (3) to homogeneity by SDS-PAGE under reducing or non-reducing conditions using Coomassie blue or silver stain.
  • An isolated antibody includes the antibody in situ within recombinant cells since at least one component of the antibody’s natural environment will not be present. Ordinarily, however, an isolated antibody will be prepared by at least one purification step.
  • the basic four-chain antibody unit is a heterotetrameric glycoprotein composed of two identical light (L) chains and two identical heavy (H) chains.
  • the term “heavy chain” as used herein refers to the larger immunoglobulin subunit which associates, through its amino terminal region, with the immunoglobulin light chain.
  • the heavy chain comprises a variable region (VH) and a constant region (CH).
  • the constant region further comprises the CHI, hinge, CH2, and CH3 domains.
  • the heavy chain comprises a CH4 domain but does not have a hinge domain.
  • heavy chains are classified as gamma, mu, alpha, delta, or epsilon (y, [i, a, 8, s), with some subclasses among them (e.g. , yl-y4, al-a2). It is the nature of this chain that determines the “class” of the antibody as IgG, IgM, IgA IgD, or IgE, respectively.
  • the immunoglobulin subclasses are well characterized and are known to confer functional specialization.
  • light chain refers to the smaller immunoglobulin subunit which associates with the amino terminal region of a heavy chain.
  • a light chain comprises a variable region (VL) and a constant region (CL).
  • Light chains are classified as either kappa or lambda (K, X) based on the amino acid sequences of their constant domains (CL). A pair of these can associate with a pair of any of the various heavy chains to form an immunoglobulin molecule.
  • V-lambda a lambda variable region linked to a kappa constant region linked to a kappa constant region linked to a lambda constant region
  • An IgM antibody for example, consists of 5 basic heterotetramer units along with an additional polypeptide called J chain, and therefore contain 10 antigen binding sites, while secreted IgA antibodies can polymerize to form polyvalent assemblages comprising 2-5 of the basic 4-chain units along with J chain.
  • the 4-chain unit is generally about 150,000 daltons.
  • Each L chain is linked to an H chain by one covalent disulfide bond, while the two H chains are linked to each other by one or more disulfide bonds depending on the H chain isotype.
  • Each H and L chain also has regularly spaced intrachain disulfide bridges.
  • Each H chain has at the N-terminus, a variable region (VH) followed by three constant domains (CH) for each of the alpha and gamma chains and four CH domains for mu and isotypes.
  • Each L chain has at the N-terminus, a variable region (VL) followed by a constant domain (CL) at its other end.
  • the VL is aligned with the VH and the CL is aligned with the first constant domain of the heavy chain (Cnl).
  • Particular amino acid residues are believed to form an interface between the light chain and heavy chain variable regions.
  • the pairing of a VH and VL together forms a single antigen-binding site.
  • variable region of an antibody refers to the variable region of the antibody light chain or the variable region of the antibody heavy chain, either alone or in combination.
  • variable refers to the fact that certain segments of the variable regions differ extensively in sequence among antibodies.
  • the variable regions of both the light (VL) and heavy (VH) chain portions mediate antigen binding and define the specificity of a particular antibody for its particular antigen.
  • VL light
  • VH heavy
  • the variability is not evenly distributed across the entirety of the variable regions. Instead, the variable regions consist of relatively invariant stretches called framework regions (FRs) separated by shorter regions of extreme variability called complementarity determining regions (CDRs) or hypervariable regions.
  • FRs framework regions
  • CDRs complementarity determining regions
  • variable regions of native heavy and light chains each comprise four FRs, largely adopting a betasheet configuration, connected by three CDRs, which form loops connecting, and in some cases forming part of, the beta-sheet structure.
  • the CDRs complement an antigen’s shape and determine the antibody’s affinity and specificity for the antigen.
  • the CDRs in each chain are held together in close proximity by the FRs and, with the CDRs from the other chain, contribute to the formation of the antigen-binding site of antibodies (see Kabat et al., Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest, 5th Ed. Public Health Service, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Md. (1991)).
  • hypervariable region when used herein refers to the amino acid residues of an antibody that are responsible for antigen binding.
  • the hypervariable region generally comprises amino acid residues from a “complementarity determining region” or “CDR” (e.g., around about residues 24-34 (LI), 50-56 (L2) and 89-97 (L3) in the VL, and around about 31-35 (Hl), 50-65 (H2) and 95-102 (H3) in the VH when numbered in accordance with the Kabat numbering system; Kabat et al., Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest, 5th Ed. Public Health Service, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Md.
  • CDR complementarity determining region
  • residues from a “hypervariable loop” e.g., residues 24- 34 (LI), 50-56 (L2) and 89-97 (L3) in the VL, and 26-32 (Hl), 52-56 (H2) and 95-101 (H3) in the VH when numbered in accordance with the Chothia numbering system; Chothia and Lesk, J. Mol. Biol.
  • residues from a “hypervariable loop’VCDR e.g., residues 27-38 (LI), 56-65 (L2) and 105-120 (L3) in the VL, and 27-38 (Hl), 56-65 (H2) and 105-120 (H3) in the VH when numbered in accordance with the IMGT numbering system; Lefranc, M. P. et al. Nucl. Acids Res. 27:209-212 (1999), Ruiz, M. et al. Nucl. Acids Res. 28:219-221 (2000)).
  • a “hypervariable loop’VCDR e.g., residues 27-38 (LI), 56-65 (L2) and 105-120 (L3) in the VL, and 27-38 (Hl), 56-65 (H2) and 105-120 (H3) in the VH when numbered in accordance with the IMGT numbering system; Lefranc, M. P. et al. Nucl. Acids Res.
  • the antibody has symmetrical insertions at one or more of the following points 28, 36 (LI), 63, 74-75 (L2) and 123 (L3) in the VL, and 28, 36 (Hl), 63, 74-75 (H2) and 123 (H3) in the V SU bH when numbered in accordance with AHo; Honneger, A. and Plunkthun, A. J. Mol. Biol. 309:657-670 (2001)).
  • a CDR may refer to CDRs defined by any of these numbering approaches or by a combination of approaches or by other desirable approaches.
  • a new definition of highly conserved core, boundary and hyper-variable regions can be used.
  • a “constant region” of an antibody refers to the constant region of the antibody light chain or the constant region of the antibody heavy chain, either alone or in combination.
  • the constant regions of the light chain (CL) and the heavy chain (CHI, CH2 or CH3, or CH4 in the case of IgM and IgE) confer important biological properties such as secretion, transplacental mobility, Fc receptor binding, complement binding, and the like.
  • CL light chain
  • CHI CH2 or CH3, or CH4 in the case of IgM and IgE
  • the constant regions are not involved directly in binding an antibody to an antigen, but exhibit various effector functions, such as participation of the antibody in antibody dependent cellular cytotoxicity (ADCC), antibody-dependent cellular phagocytosis (ADCP), antibody-dependent neutrophil phagocytosis (ADNP), and antibody-dependent complement deposition (ADCD).
  • ADCC antibody dependent cellular cytotoxicity
  • ADCP antibody-dependent cellular phagocytosis
  • ADNP antibody-dependent neutrophil phagocytosis
  • ADCD antibody-dependent complement deposition
  • the antibody may be an antibody fragment.
  • “Antibody fragments” comprise only a portion of an intact antibody, generally including an antigen binding site of the intact antibody and thus retaining the ability to bind antigen.
  • Examples of antibody fragments encompassed by the present definition include: (i) the Fab fragment, having VL, CL, VH and CHI domains; (ii) the Fab' fragment, which is a Fab fragment having one or more cysteine residues at the C-terminus of the CHI domain; (iii) the Fd fragment having VH and CHI domains; (iv) the Fd' fragment having VH and Cnl domains and one or more cysteine residues at the C-terminus of the Cnl domain; (v) the Fv fragment having the VL and VH domains of a single antibody; (vi) the dAb fragment which consists of a VH domain; (vii) isolated CDR regions; (viii) F(ab')2 fragments, a bivalent fragment including two Fab
  • the antibody may be a chimeric antibody.
  • Chimeric antibodies refers to those antibodies wherein one portion of each of the amino acid sequences of heavy and light chains is homologous to corresponding sequences in antibodies derived from a particular species or belonging to a particular class, while the remaining segment of the chains is homologous to corresponding sequences in another.
  • the term “monoclonal antibody” as used herein refers to an antibody obtained from a population of substantially homogeneous antibodies, i.e., the individual antibodies comprising the population are identical except for possible naturally occurring mutations that may be present in minor amounts. Monoclonal antibodies are highly specific, being directed against a single antigenic site. Furthermore, in contrast to polyclonal antibody preparations that include different antibodies directed against different determinants (epitopes), each monoclonal antibody is directed against a single determinant on the antigen. In addition to their specificity, monoclonal antibodies are advantageous in that they may be synthesized uncontaminated by other antibodies. The modifier “monoclonal” is not to be constmed as requiring production of the antibody by any particular method.
  • the monoclonal antibodies useful in the present disclosure may be prepared by the hybridoma methodology first described by Kohler et al., Nature, 256:495 (1975), or may be made using recombinant DNA methods in bacterial, eukaryotic animal or plant cells (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567) after single cell sorting of an antigen specific B cell, an antigen specific plasmablast responding to an infection or immunization, or capture of linked heavy and light chains from single cells in a bulk sorted antigen specific collection.
  • the monoclonal antibodies may also be isolated from phage antibody libraries using the techniques described in Clackson et al., Nature, 352:624-628 (1991) and Marks et al., J. Mol. Biol., 222:581-597 (1991), for example.
  • a suitable approach is to identify subjects that have been exposed to the pathogens, such as those who have been diagnosed as having contracted the disease, or those who have been vaccinated to generate protective immunity against the pathogen or to test the safety or efficacy of an experimental vaccine. Circulating anti-pathogen antibodies can be detected, and antibody encoding or producing B cells from the antibody -positive subject may then be obtained.
  • a single chain variable fragment is a fusion of the variable regions of the heavy and light chains of immunoglobulins, linked together with a short linker. This chimeric molecule retains the specificity of the original immunoglobulin, despite removal of the constant regions and the introduction of a linker peptide. This modification usually leaves the specificity unaltered.
  • scFv can be created directly from subcloned heavy and light chains derived from a hybridoma or B cell.
  • Single chain variable fragments lack the constant Fc region found in complete antibody molecules, and thus, the common binding sites (e.g., protein A/G) used to purify antibodies.
  • Flexible linkers generally are comprised of helix- and turn-promoting amino acid residues such as alanine, serine and glycine. However, other residues can function as well.
  • the linker may have a proline residue two residues after the Vn C terminus and an abundance of arginines and prolines at other positions.
  • a single-chain antibody may also be created by joining receptor light and heavy chains using a non-peptide linker or chemical unit.
  • the light and heavy chains will be produced in distinct cells, purified, and subsequently linked together in an appropriate fashion (i.e., the N-terminus of the heavy chain being attached to the C-terminus of the light chain via an appropriate chemical bridge).
  • Cross-linking reagents are used to form molecular bridges that tie functional groups of two different molecules, e.g., a stabilizing and coagulating agent.
  • a stabilizing and coagulating agent e.g., a stabilizing and coagulating agent.
  • dimers or multimers of the same analog or heteromeric complexes comprised of different analogs can be created.
  • hetero-bifunctional cross-linkers can be used that eliminate unwanted homopolymer formation.
  • An exemplary hetero-bifunctional cross-linker contains two reactive groups: one reacting with primary amine group (e.g., N-hydroxy succinimide) and the other reacting with a thiol group (e.g., pyridyl disulfide, maleimides, halogens, etc.).
  • primary amine group e.g., N-hydroxy succinimide
  • a thiol group e.g., pyridyl disulfide, maleimides, halogens, etc.
  • the cross-linker may react with the lysine residue(s) of one protein (e.g., the selected antibody or fragment) and through the thiol reactive group, the cross-linker, already tied up to the first protein, reacts with the cysteine residue (free sulfhydryl group) of the other protein (e.g., the selective agent).
  • cross-linker having reasonable stability in blood will be employed.
  • Numerous types of disulfide -bond containing linkers are known that can be successfully employed to conjugate targeting and therapeutic/preventative agents.
  • Linkers that contain a disulfide bond that is sterically hindered may prove to give greater stability in vivo, preventing release of the targeting peptide prior to reaching the site of action. These linkers are thus one group of linking agents.
  • SMPT is a bifunctional cross-linker containing a disulfide bond that is “sterically hindered” by an adjacent benzene ring and methyl groups. It is believed that steric hindrance of the disulfide bond serves a function of protecting the bond from attack by thiolate anions such as glutathione which can be present in tissues and blood, and thereby help in preventing decoupling of the conjugate prior to the delivery of the attached agent to the target site.
  • thiolate anions such as glutathione which can be present in tissues and blood
  • the SMPT cross-linking reagent lends the ability to cross-link functional groups such as the SH of cysteine or primary amines (e.g., the epsilon amino group of lysine).
  • Another possible type of crosslinker includes the hetero-bifunctional photoreactive phenylazides containing a cleavable disulfide bond such as sulfosuccinimidyl-2-(p-azido salicylamido) ethyl- 1,3'- dithiopropionate.
  • the N-hydroxy-succinimidyl group reacts with primary amino groups and the phenylazide (upon photolysis) reacts non-selectively with any amino acid residue.
  • non-hindered linkers also can be employed in accordance herewith.
  • Other useful cross-linkers include SATA, SPDP and 2-iminothiolane. The use of such cross-linkers is well understood in the art. Flexible linkers may also be used.
  • U.S. Patent 4,680,3308 describes bifunctional linkers useful for producing conjugates of ligands with amine-containing polymers and/or proteins, especially for forming antibody conjugates with chelators, drugs, enzymes, detectable labels and the like.
  • U.S. Patents 5,141,648 and 5,563,250 disclose cleavable conjugates containing a labile bond that is cleavable under a variety of mild conditions. This linker is particularly useful in that the agent of interest may be bonded directly to the linker, with cleavage resulting in release of the active agent. Particular uses include adding a free amino or free sulfhydryl group to a protein, such as an antibody, or a drug.
  • U.S. Patent 5,856,456 provides peptide linkers for use in connecting polypeptide constituents to make fusion proteins, e.g., single chain antibodies.
  • the linker is up to about 50 amino acids in length, contains at least one occurrence of a charged amino acid (preferably arginine or lysine) followed by a proline, and is characterized by greater stability and reduced aggregation.
  • U.S. Patent 5,880,270 discloses aminooxy-containing linkers useful in a variety of immunodiagnostic and separative techniques.
  • Antibodies may be bispecific or multispecific. “Bispecific antibodies” are antibodies that have binding specificities for at least two different epitopes. Exemplar ⁇ ' bispecific antibodies may bind to two different epitopes of a single antigen. Other such antibodies may combine a first antigen binding site with a binding site for a second antigen.
  • an antigen-specific arm may be combined with an arm that binds to a triggering molecule on a leukocyte, such as a T-cell receptor molecule (e.g., CD3), or Fc receptors for IgG (FcyR), such as FcyRI (CD64), FcyRII (CD32) and Fc gamma RIII (CD16), so as to focus and localize cellular defense mechanisms to the infected cell.
  • Bispecific antibodies may also be used to localize cytotoxic agents to infected cells. These antibodies possess an antigen-binding arm and an arm that binds the cytotoxic agent (e.g.
  • Bispecific antibodies can be prepared as full-length antibodies or antibody fragments (e.g., F(ab')2 bispecific antibodies). Taki et al. (2015) describes a bispecific anti-HSP70/anti-CD3 antibody.
  • antibody variable regions with the desired binding specificities are fused to immunoglobulin constant domain sequences.
  • the fusion is with an Ig heavy chain constant domain, comprising at least part of the hinge, CH2, and CH3 regions. It is preferred to have the first heavy-chain constant region (Cm) containing the site necessary for light chain bonding, present in at least one of the fusions.
  • DNAs encoding the immunoglobulin heavy chain fusions and, if desired, the immunoglobulin light chain are inserted into separate expression vectors, and are co-transfected into a suitable host cell.
  • the bispecific antibodies may be composed of a hybrid immunoglobulin heavy chain with a first binding specificity in one arm, and a hybrid immunoglobulin heavy chain-light chain pair (providing a second binding specificity) in the other arm.
  • This asymmetric structure facilitates the separation of the desired bispecific compound from unwanted immunoglobulin chain combinations, as the presence of an immunoglobulin light chain in only one half of the bispecific molecule provides for a facile way of separation. This approach is disclosed in WO 94/04690.
  • For further details of generating bispecific antibodies see, for example, Suresh et al. , Methods in Enzymology, 121:210 (1986).
  • the interface between a pair of antibody molecules can be engineered to maximize the percentage of heterodimers that are recovered from recombinant cell culture.
  • the preferred interface comprises at least a part of the CH3 domain.
  • one or more small amino acid side chains from the interface of the first antibody molecule are replaced with larger side chains (e.g., tyrosine or tryptophan).
  • Compensatory “cavities” of identical or similar size to the large side chain(s) are created on the interface of the second antibody molecule by replacing large amino acid side chains with smaller ones (e.g. , alanine or threonine). This provides a mechanism for increasing the yield of the heterodimer over other unwanted endproducts such as homodimers.
  • Bispecific antibodies include cross-linked or “heteroconjugate” antibodies.
  • one of the antibodies in the heteroconjugate can be coupled to avidin, the other to biotin.
  • Such antibodies have, for example, been proposed to target immune system cells to unwanted cells (U.S. Pat. No. 4,676,980).
  • Heteroconjugate antibodies may be made using any convenient cross-linking methods. Suitable cross-linking agents are well known in the art, and are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,676,980, along with a number of cross-linking techniques.
  • bispecific antibodies can be prepared using chemical linkage.
  • Brennan et al., Science, 229: 81 (1985) describe a procedure wherein intact antibodies are proteolytically cleaved to generate F(ab')2 fragments. These fragments are reduced in the presence of the dithiol complexing agent, sodium arsenite, to stabilize vicinal dithiols and prevent intermolecular disulfide formation.
  • the Fab' fragments generated are then converted to thionitrobenzoate (TNB) derivatives.
  • One of the Fab'-TNB derivatives is then reconverted to the Fab'-thiol by reduction with mercaptoethylamine and is mixed with an equimolar amount of the other Fab’-TNB derivative to form the bispecific antibody.
  • the bispecific antibodies produced can be used as agents for the selective immobilization of enzymes.
  • bispecific antibodies have been produced using leucine zippers (Kostelny et al., J. Immunol., 148(5): 1547-1553, 1992).
  • the leucine zipper peptides from the Fos and Jun proteins were linked to the Fab’ portions of two different antibodies by gene fusion.
  • the antibody homodimers were reduced at the hinge region to form monomers and then re-oxidized to form the antibody heterodimers. This method can also be utilized for the production of antibody homodimers.
  • the “diabody” technology described by Hollinger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 90:6444-6448 (1993) has provided an alternative mechanism for making bispecific antibody fragments.
  • the fragments comprise a Vn connected to a VL by a linker that is too short to allow pairing between the two domains on the same chain. Accordingly, the Vn and VL domains of one fragment are forced to pair with the complementary VL and Vn domains of another fragment, thereby forming two antigen-binding sites.
  • Another strategy for making bispecific antibody fragments by the use of single-chain Fv (sFv) dimers has also been reported. See Gruber et al., J. Immunol., 152:5368 (1994).
  • a bispecific or multispecific antibody may be formed as a DOCK-AND- LOCKTM (DNLTM) complex (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,521,056; 7,527,787; 7,534,866; 7,550,143 and 7,666,400).
  • DDD dimerization and docking domain
  • R regulatory
  • AD anchor domain
  • the DDD and AD peptides may be attached to any protein, peptide or other molecule. Because the DDD sequences spontaneously dimerize and bind to the AD sequence, the technique allows the formation of complexes between any selected molecules that may be attached to DDD or AD sequences.
  • Antibodies with more than two valencies are contemplated.
  • trispecific antibodies can be prepared (Tutt et al., J. Immunol. 147: 60, 1991; Xu et al., Science, 358(6359):85-90, 2017).
  • the antibodies may also involve sequences or moieties that permit dimerization or multimerization of the receptors. Such sequences include those derived from IgA, which permit formation of multimers in conjunction with the J-chain. Another multimerization domain is the Gal4 dimerization domain.
  • a multivalent antibody may be internalized (and/or catabolized) faster than a bivalent antibody by a cell expressing an antigen to which the antibody binds.
  • the antibodies of the present disclosure can be multivalent antibodies with three or more antigen binding sites (e.g., tetravalent antibodies), which can be readily produced by recombinant expression of nucleic acid encoding the polypeptide chains of the antibody.
  • the multivalent antibody can comprise a dimerization domain and three or more antigen binding sites.
  • the preferred dimerization domain comprises (or consists of) an Fc region or a hinge region. In this scenario, the antibody will comprise an Fc region and three or more antigen binding sites amino-terminal to the Fc region.
  • Multivalent antibodies may comprise (or consist of) three to about eight, for example four, antigen binding sites.
  • the multivalent antibody comprises at least one polypeptide chain (and preferably two polypeptide chains), wherein the polypeptide chain(s) comprise two or more variable regions.
  • the polypeptide chain(s) may comprise VDl-(Xl).sub.n-VD2-(X2) n -Fc, wherein VD1 is a first variable region, VD2 is a second variable region, Fc is one polypeptide chain of an Fc region, XI and X2 represent an amino acid or polypeptide, and n is 0 or 1.
  • the polypeptide chain(s) may comprise: VH-CH1 -flexible linker-VH-CHl-Fc region chain; or VH-CHl-VH-CHl-Fc region chain.
  • the multivalent antibody herein may further comprise at least two (and preferably four) light chain variable region polypeptides.
  • the multivalent antibody herein may, for instance, comprise from about two to about eight light chain variable region polypeptides.
  • the light chain variable region polypeptides contemplated here comprise a light chain variable region and, optionally, further comprise a CL domain.
  • Charge modifications are particularly useful in the context of a multispecific antibody, where amino acid substitutions in Fab molecules result in reducing the mispairing of light chains with non-matching heavy chains (Bence-Jones-type side products), which can occur in the production of Fab-based bi-/multispecific antigen binding molecules with a VH/VL exchange in one (or more, in case of molecules comprising more than two antigenbinding Fab molecules) of their binding arms (see also PCT publication no. WO 2015/150447, particularly the examples therein, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • a bi-specific T-cell engagers is an artificial bispecific monoclonal antibody that directs a host’s immune system, more specifically the T cells’ cytotoxic activity, to target diseased cells.
  • BiTEs are fusion proteins consisting of two single-chain variable fragments (scFvs) of different antibodies, or amino acid sequences from four different genes, on a single peptide chain of about 55 kilodaltons.
  • scFvs single-chain variable fragments
  • One of the scFvs binds to T cells via the CD3 receptor, and the other to an infected cell via a specific molecule.
  • BiTEs form a link between T cells and target cells. This causes T cells to exert cytotoxic activity on target cells by producing proteins like perforin and granzymes, independently of the presence of MHC I or co- stimulatory molecules. These proteins enter the target cells and initiate apoptosis. This action mimics physiological processes observed during T cell attacks against infected cells.
  • Antibodies of the present disclosure may be linked to at least one agent to form an antibody conjugate.
  • the conjugate can be, for example, an antibody conjugated to another proteinaceous, carbohydrate, lipid, or mixed moiety molecule(s).
  • Such antibody conjugates include, but are not limited to, modifications that include linking the antibody to one or more polymers.
  • an antibody may be linked to one or more water-soluble polymers. Linkage to a water-soluble polymer reduces the likelihood that the antibody will precipitate in an aqueous environment, such as a physiological environment.
  • One skilled in the art can select a suitable water-soluble polymer based on considerations including, but not limited to, whether the polymer/antibody conjugate will be used in the treatment of a patient and, if so, the pharmacological profile of the antibody (e.g., half-life, dosage, activity, antigenicity, and/or other factors).
  • the pharmacological profile of the antibody e.g., half-life, dosage, activity, antigenicity, and/or other factors.
  • a molecule or moiety may be, but is not limited to, at least one effector or reporter molecule.
  • Effector molecules comprise molecules having a desired activity, e.g., cytotoxic activity.
  • Non-limiting examples of effector molecules which have been attached to antibodies include toxins, anti-tumor agents, therapeutic enzymes, radionuclides, antiviral agents, chelating agents, cytokines, growth factors, and oligo- or polynucleotides.
  • a reporter molecule is defined as any moiety which may be detected using an assay.
  • Non-limiting examples of reporter molecules which have been conjugated to antibodies include enzymes, radiolabels, haptens, fluorescent labels, phosphorescent molecules, chemiluminescent molecules, chromophores, photoaffinity molecules, colored particles or ligands, an enzyme (e.g., that catalyzes a colorimetric or fluorometric reaction), a substrate, a solid matrix, such as biotin.
  • An antibody may comprise one, two, or more of any of these labels.
  • Antibody conjugates may be used to deliver cytotoxic agents to target cells.
  • Cytotoxic agents of this type may improve antibody-mediated cytotoxicity, and include such moieties as cytokines that directly or indirectly stimulate cell death, radioisotopes, chemotherapeutic drugs (including prodrugs), bacterial toxins (e.g., pseudomonas exotoxin, diphtheria toxin, etc.), plant toxins (e.g., ricin, gelonin, etc.), chemical conjugates (e.g., maytansinoid toxins, auristatins, a-amanitin, anthracy clines, calechaemicin, etc.), radioconjugates, enzyme conjugates (e.g., RNase conjugates, granzyme antibody-directed enzyme/prodrug therapy), and the like.
  • cytokines that directly or indirectly stimulate cell death
  • chemotherapeutic drugs including prodrugs
  • bacterial toxins e.g., pseudomonas ex
  • Antibody conjugates are also used as diagnostic agents.
  • Antibody diagnostics generally fall within two classes, those for use in in vitro diagnostics, such as in a variety of immunoassays, and those for use in vivo diagnostic protocols, generally known as “antibody-directed imaging.”
  • Many appropriate imaging agents are known in the art, as are methods for their attachment to antibodies (see, for e.g., U.S. Patents 5,021,236, 4,938,948, and 4,472,509).
  • the imaging moieties used can be paramagnetic ions, radioactive isotopes, fluorochromes, NMR-detectable substances, and X-ray imaging agents.
  • the paramagnetic ions contemplated for use as conjugates include chromium (III), manganese (II), iron (III), iron (II), cobalt (II), nickel (II), copper (II), neodymium (III), samarium (III), ytterbium (III), gadolinium (III), vanadium (II), terbium (III), dysprosium (III), holmium (III) and/or erbium (III), with gadolinium being particularly preferred.
  • Ions useful in other contexts, such as X-ray imaging include but are not limited to lanthanum (III), gold (III), lead (II), and bismuth (III).
  • the radioactive isotopes contemplated for use as conjugated include astatine 211 , 14 carbon, 51 chromium, 36 chlorine, 57 cobalt, 58 cobalt, copper 67 , 152 Eu, gallium 67 , 3 hydrogen, iodine 123 , iodine 125 , iodine 131 , indium 111 , 59 iron, 32 phosphorus, rhenium 186 , rhenium 188 , 75 selenium, 35 sulphur, technicium 99 '" and/or yttrium 90 .
  • 125 I is often being preferred.
  • Radioactively labeled monoclonal antibodies of the present disclosure may be produced according to well-known methods in the art. For instance, monoclonal antibodies can be iodinated by contact with sodium and/or potassium iodide and a chemical oxidizing agent such as sodium hypochlorite, or an enzymatic oxidizing agent, such as lactoperoxidase. Monoclonal antibodies according to the disclosure may be labeled with technetium 99 ” 1 by ligand exchange process, for example, by reducing pertechnate with stannous solution, chelating the reduced technetium onto a Sephadex column and applying the antibody to this column.
  • direct labeling techniques may be used, e.g., by incubating pertechnate, a reducing agent such as SNCh, a buffer solution such as sodium-potassium phthalate solution, and the antibody.
  • Intermediary functional groups which are often used to bind radioisotopes which exist as metallic ions to antibody are diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid (DTP A) or ethylene diaminetetracetic acid (EDTA).
  • the fluorescent labels contemplated for use as conjugates include Alexa 350, Alexa 430, AMCA, BODIPY 630/650, BODIPY 650/665, BODIPY-FL, BODIPY-R6G, BODIPY-TMR, BODIPY-TRX, Cascade Blue, Cy3, Cy5,6-FAM, Fluorescein Isothiocyanate, HEX, 6-JOE, Oregon Green 488, Oregon Green 500, Oregon Green 514, Pacific Blue, REG, Rhodamine Green, Rhodamine Red, Renographin, ROX, TAMRA, TET, tetramethylrhodamine, and/or Texas Red.
  • Additional types of antibodies contemplated in the present disclosure are those intended primarily for use in vitro, where the antibody is linked to a secondary binding ligand and/or to an enzyme (an enzyme tag) that will generate a colored product upon contact with a chromogenic substrate.
  • suitable enzymes include urease, alkaline phosphatase, (horseradish) hydrogen peroxidase or glucose oxidase.
  • Preferred secondary binding ligands are biotin and avidin and streptavidin compounds.
  • a metal chelate complex employing, for example, an organic chelating agent such as a diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid anhydride (DTP A); ethylenetriaminetetraacetic acid; N- chloro-p-toluenesulfonamide; and/or tetrachloro-3a-6a-diphenylglycouril-3 attached to the antibody (U.S. Patents 4,472,509 and 4,938,948).
  • DTP A diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid anhydride
  • ethylenetriaminetetraacetic acid N- chloro-p-toluenesulfonamide
  • tetrachloro-3a-6a-diphenylglycouril-3 attached to the antibody
  • Monoclonal antibodies may also be reacted with an enzyme in the presence of a coupling agent such as glutaraldehyde or periodate.
  • Conjugates with fluorescein markers are prepared in the presence of these coupling agents or by reaction with an isothiocyanate.
  • imaging of breast tumors is achieved using monoclonal antibodies and the detectable imaging moieties are bound to the antibody using linkers such as methyl-p-hydroxybenzimidate or N-succinimidyl-3-(4- hydroxyphenyl)propionate.
  • Another known method of site-specific attachment of molecules to antibodies comprises the reaction of antibodies with hapten-based affinity labels.
  • hapten-based affinity labels react with amino acids in the antigen binding site, thereby destroying this site and blocking specific antigen reaction.
  • this may not be advantageous since it results in loss of antigen binding by the antibody conjugate.
  • Molecules containing azido groups may also be used to form covalent bonds to proteins through reactive nitrene intermediates that are generated by low intensity ultraviolet light.
  • 2- and 8-azido analogues of purine nucleotides have been used as site-directed photoprobes to identify nucleotide binding proteins in crude cell extracts.
  • the 2- and 8-azido nucleotides have also been used to map nucleotide binding domains of purified proteins and may be used as antibody binding agents.
  • Derivatization of immunoglobulins by selectively introducing sulfhydryl groups in the Fc region of an immunoglobulin, using reaction conditions that do not alter the antibody combining site are also contemplated.
  • Antibody conjugates produced according to this methodology are disclosed to exhibit improved longevity, specificity and sensitivity (U.S. Patent 5,196,066, incorporated herein by reference).
  • Site-specific attachment of effector or reporter molecules, wherein the reporter or effector molecule is conjugated to a carbohydrate residue in the Fc region have also been disclosed in the literature. This approach has been reported to produce diagnostically and therapeutically promising antibodies which are currently in clinical evaluation.
  • Antibody drug conjugates are a class of highly potent biopharmaceutical drugs designed as a targeted therapy for the treatment of people with disease.
  • ADCs are complex molecules composed of an antibody (a whole mAb or an antibody fragment, such as a scFv) linked, via a stable chemical linker with labile bonds, to a biological active cytotoxic/anti-viral payload or drug.
  • Antibody drug conjugates are examples of bioconjugates and immunoconjugates.
  • antibody-drug conjugates allow sensitive discrimination between healthy and diseased tissue. This means that, in contrast to traditional systemic approaches, antibody-drug conjugates target and attack the diseased cell so that healthy cells are less severely affected.
  • an anticancer drug e.g., a cell toxin or cytotoxin
  • an antibody that specifically targets a certain cell marker e.g., a protein that, ideally, is only to be found in or on diseased cells.
  • Antibodies track these proteins down in the body and attach themselves to the surface of the diseased cells.
  • the biochemical reaction between the antibody and the target protein (antigen) triggers a signal in the targeted cell, which then absorbs or internalizes the antibody together with the cytotoxin.
  • the cytotoxic drug is released and kills the cell or impairs cellular replication.
  • a stable link between the antibody and cytotoxic agent is a crucial aspect of an ADC.
  • Linkers are based on chemical motifs including disulfides, hydrazones or peptides (cleavable), or thioethers (noncleavable) and control the distribution and delivery of the cytotoxic agent to the target cell. Cleavable and noncleavable types of linkers have been proven to be safe in preclinical and clinical trials.
  • Brentuximab vedotin includes an enzymesensitive cleavable linker that delivers the potent and highly toxic antimicrotubule agent Monomethyl auristatin E or MMAE, a synthetic antineoplastic agent, to human specific CD30-positive malignant cells. Because of its high toxicity MMAE, which inhibits cell division by blocking the polymerization of tubulin, cannot be used as a single-agent chemotherapeutic drug. However, the combination of MMAE linked to an anti-CD30 monoclonal antibody (cAClO, a cell membrane protein of the tumor necrosis factor or TNF receptor) proved to be stable in extracellular fluid, cleavable by cathepsin and safe for therapy.
  • cAClO an anti-CD30 monoclonal antibody
  • Trastuzumab emtansine is a combination of the microtubule-formation inhibitor mertansine (DM-1), a derivative of the Maytansine, and antibody trastuzumab (Herceptin®/Genentech/Roche) attached by a stable, non-cleavable linker.
  • DM-1 microtubule-formation inhibitor mertansine
  • Maytansine a derivative of the Maytansine
  • trastuzumab Herceptin®/Genentech/Roche
  • linker e.g., anti-cancer
  • a non-cleavable linker keeps the drug within the cell.
  • the entire antibody, linker, and cytotoxic agent enter the targeted cell where the antibody is degraded to the level of amino acids.
  • the resulting complex - amino acid, linker and cytotoxic agent - now becomes the active drug.
  • cleavable linkers are catalyzed by enzymes in the host cell, thereby releasing the cytotoxic agent.
  • cleavable linker adds an extra molecule between the cytotoxic drug and the cleavage site.
  • This linker technology allows researchers to create ADCs with more flexibility without worrying about changing cleavage kinetics.
  • researchers are also developing a new method of peptide cleavage based on Edman degradation.
  • Future direction in the development of ADCs also include the development of site-specific conjugation (TDCs) to further improve stability and therapeutic index and a-emitting immunoconjugates and antibody-conjugated nanoparticles.
  • TDCs site-specific conjugation
  • the antibody is a recombinant antibody that is suitable for action inside of a cell - such antibodies are known as “intrabodies.” These antibodies may interfere with target function by a variety of mechanisms, such as by altering intracellular protein trafficking, interfering with enzymatic function, and blocking proteinprotein or protein-DNA interactions. In many ways, their structures mimic or parallel those of single chain and single domain antibodies, discussed above. Indeed, single-transcript/single- chain is an important feature that permits intracellular expression in a target cell, and also makes protein transit across cell membranes more feasible. However, additional features are required. An additional feature that intrabodies may require is a signal for intracellular targeting. Vectors that can target intrabodies (or other proteins) to subcellular regions such as the cytoplasm, nucleus, mitochondria and ER have been designed and are commercially available (Invitrogen Corp.).
  • intrabody therapeutics include cell/tissue targeting, and stability.
  • delivery a variety of approaches have been employed, such as tissue-directed delivery, use of cell-type specific promoters, viral-based delivery, use of cell-permeability /membrane translocating peptides, and delivery using exosomes.
  • tissue-directed delivery use of cell-type specific promoters
  • viral-based delivery use of cell-permeability /membrane translocating peptides
  • exosomes lipid-based nanoparticles, or exosomes, as taught in U.S. Pat. Appln. Publn. 2018/0177727, which is incorporated by reference here in its entirety.
  • the approach is generally to either screen by brute force, including methods that involve phage display and may include sequence maturation or development of consensus sequences, or more directed modifications such as insertion stabilizing sequences ( ⁇ ?.g., Fc regions, chaperone protein sequences, leucine zippers) and disulfide replacement/modification.
  • the methods for generating monoclonal antibodies generally begin along the same lines as those for preparing polyclonal antibodies.
  • the first step for both of these methods is immunization of an appropriate host.
  • a given composition for immunization may vary in its immunogenicity. It is often necessary therefore to boost the host immune system, as may be achieved by coupling a peptide or polypeptide immunogen to a carrier.
  • exemplary and preferred carriers are keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH) and bovine serum albumin (BSA).
  • KLH keyhole limpet hemocyanin
  • BSA bovine serum albumin
  • Other albumins such as ovalbumin, mouse serum albumin or rabbit serum albumin can also be used as carriers.
  • Means for conjugating a polypeptide to a carrier protein are well known in the art and include glutaraldehyde, m- maleimidobencoyl-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester, carbodiimyde and bis-biazotized benzidine.
  • the immunogenicity of a particular immunogen composition can be enhanced by the use of non-specific stimulators of the immune response, known as adjuvants.
  • Exemplary and preferred adjuvants in animals include complete Freund’s adjuvant (a non-specific stimulator of the immune response containing killed Mycobacterium tuberculosis), incomplete Freund’s adjuvants and aluminum hydroxide adjuvant and in humans include alum, CpG, MFP59, and combinations of immunostimulatory molecules (“Adjuvant Systems”, such as AS01 or AS03). Additional experimental forms of inoculation to induce antigen-specific B cells are possible, including nanoparticle vaccines, or gene- encoded antigens delivered as DNA or RNA genes in a physical delivery system (such as lipid nanoparticle or on a gold biolistic bead), and delivered with needle, gene gun, or transcutaneous electroporation device.
  • complete Freund’s adjuvant a non-specific stimulator of the immune response containing killed Mycobacterium tuberculosis
  • incomplete Freund’s adjuvants and aluminum hydroxide adjuvant and in humans include alum, CpG, MFP59, and combinations of immunosti
  • the antigen gene also can be carried as encoded by a replication competent or defective viral vector such as adenovirus, adeno-associated virus, poxvirus, herpesvirus, or alphavirus replicon, or alternatively a virus-like particle.
  • a replication competent or defective viral vector such as adenovirus, adeno-associated virus, poxvirus, herpesvirus, or alphavirus replicon, or alternatively a virus-like particle.
  • Methods for generating hybrids of antibody -producing spleen or lymph node cells and myeloma cells usually comprise mixing somatic cells with myeloma cells in a 2:1 proportion, though the proportion may vary from about 20: 1 to about 1:1, in the presence of an agent or agents (chemical or electrical) that promote the fusion of cell membranes.
  • transformation of human B cells with Epstein Barr virus (EBV) as an initial step increases the size of the B cells, enhancing fusion with the relatively large-sized myeloma cells. Transformation efficiency by EBV is enhanced by using CpG and a Chk2 inhibitor drug in the transforming medium.
  • EBV Epstein Barr virus
  • human B cells can be activated by co-culture with transfected cell lines expressing CD40 Ligand (CD 154) in medium containing additional soluble factors, such as IL-21 and human B cell Activating Factor (BAFF), a Type II member of the TNF superfamily.
  • CD40 Ligand CD 1414
  • BAFF human B cell Activating Factor
  • Fusion methods using Sendai vims or polyethylene glycol (PEG) are also known.
  • the use of electrically induced fusion methods is also appropriate. Fusion procedures usually produce viable hybrids at low frequencies, about 1 x 10’ 6 to 1 x 10“ 8 , but with optimized procedures one can achieve fusion efficiencies close to 1 in 200.
  • the selective medium is generally one that contains an agent that blocks the de novo synthesis of nucleotides in the tissue culture medium.
  • agents are aminopterin, methotrexate, and azaserine. Aminopterin and methotrexate block de novo synthesis of both purines and pyrimidines, whereas azaserine blocks only purine synthesis.
  • the medium is supplemented with hypoxanthine and thymidine as a source of nucleotides (HAT medium).
  • HAT medium a source of nucleotides
  • azaserine the medium is supplemented with hypoxanthine.
  • Ouabain is added if the B cell source is an EBV-transformed human B cell line, in order to eliminate EBV-transformed lines that have not fused to the myeloma.
  • the preferred selection medium is HAT or HAT with ouabain. Only cells capable of operating nucleotide salvage pathways are able to survive in HAT medium.
  • the myeloma cells are defective in key enzymes of the salvage pathway, e.g., hypoxanthine phosphoribosyl transferase (HPRT), and they cannot survive.
  • HPRT hypoxanthine phosphoribosyl transferase
  • the B cells can operate this pathway, but they have a limited life span in culture and generally die within about two weeks. Therefore, the only cells that can survive in the selective media are those hybrids formed from myeloma and B cells.
  • ouabain may also be used for drug selection of hybrids as EBV-transformed B cells are susceptible to drug killing, whereas the myeloma partner used is chosen to be ouabain resistant.
  • Culturing provides a population of hybridomas from which specific hybridomas are selected. Typically, selection of hybridomas is performed by culturing the cells by single-clone dilution in microtiter plates, followed by testing the individual clonal supernatants (after about two to three weeks) for the desired reactivity.
  • the assay should be sensitive, simple and rapid, such as radioimmunoassays, enzyme immunoassays, cytotoxicity assays, plaque assays dot immunobinding assays, and the like.
  • the selected hybridomas are then serially diluted or single-cell sorted by flow cytometric sorting and cloned into individual antibody-producing cell lines, which clones can then be propagated indefinitely to provide monoclonal antibodies.
  • the cell lines may be exploited for monoclonal antibody production in two basic ways.
  • a sample of the hybridoma can be injected (often into the peritoneal cavity) into an animal (e.g., a mouse).
  • the animals are primed with a hydrocarbon, especially oils such as pristane (tetramethylpentadecane) prior to injection.
  • pristane tetramethylpentadecane
  • the injected animal develops tumors secreting the specific monoclonal antibody produced by the fused cell hybrid.
  • the body fluids of the animal such as serum or ascites fluid, can then be tapped to provide monoclonal antibodies in high concentration.
  • the individual cell lines could also be cultured in vitro, where the monoclonal antibodies are naturally secreted into the culture medium from which they can be readily obtained in high concentrations.
  • human hybridoma cells lines can be used in vitro to produce immunoglobulins in cell supernatant.
  • the cell lines can be adapted for growth in serum-free medium to optimize the ability to recover human monoclonal immunoglobulins of high purity.
  • Hybridomas may be cultured, then cells lysed, and total RNA extracted. Random hexamers may be used with RT to generate cDNA copies of RNA, and then PCR performed using a multiplex mixture of PCR primers expected to amplify all human variable gene sequences. PCR product can be cloned into pGEM-T Easy vector, then sequenced by automated DNA sequencing using standard vector primers. Assay of binding and neutralization may be performed using antibodies collected from hybridoma supernatants and purified by FPLC, using Protein G columns.
  • Recombinant full-length IgG antibodies can be generated by subcloning heavy and light chain Fv DNAs from the cloning vector into an IgG plasmid vector, transfected into 293 (e.g. , Freestyle) cells or CHO cells, and antibodies can be collected and purified from the 293 or CHO cell supernatant.
  • 293 e.g. , Freestyle
  • Other appropriate host cells systems include bacteria, such as E. coli, insect cells (S2, Sf9, Sf29, High Five), plant cells (e.g., tobacco, with or without engineering for human- like glycans), algae, or in a variety of non-human transgenic contexts, such as mice, rats, goats or cows.
  • Antibody coding sequences can be RNA, such as native RNA or modified RNA.
  • Modified RNA contemplates certain chemical modifications that confer increased stability and low immunogenicity to mRNAs, thereby facilitating expression of therapeutically important proteins. For instance, Nl-methyl-pseudouridine (NlnTP) outperforms several other nucleoside modifications and their combinations in terms of translation capacity.
  • RNA may be delivered as naked RNA or in a delivery vehicle, such as a lipid nanoparticle.
  • DNA encoding the antibody may be employed for the same purposes.
  • the DNA is included in an expression cassette comprising a promoter active in the host cell for which it is designed.
  • the expression cassette is advantageously included in a replicable vector, such as a conventional plasmid or minivector.
  • Vectors include viral vectors, such as poxviruses, adenoviruses, herpesviruses, adeno-associated viruses, and lentiviruses are contemplated.
  • Replicons encoding antibody genes such as alphavirus replicons based on VEE virus or Sindbis virus are also contemplated. Delivery of such vectors can be performed by needle through intramuscular, subcutaneous, or intradermal routes, or by transcutaneous electroporation when in vivo expression is desired.
  • a molecular cloning approach may be used to generate monoclonal antibodies.
  • Single B cells labeled with the antigen of interest can be sorted physically using paramagnetic bead selection or flow cytometric sorting, then RNA can be isolated from the single cells and antibody genes amplified by RT-PCR.
  • antigen-specific bulk sorted populations of cells can be segregated into microvesicles and the matched heavy and light chain variable genes recovered from single cells using physical linkage of heavy and light chain amplicons, or common barcoding of heavy and light chain genes from a vesicle.
  • Matched heavy and light chain genes form single cells also can be obtained from populations of antigen specific B cells by treating cells with cell-penetrating nanoparticles bearing RT-PCR primers and barcodes for marking transcripts with one barcode per cell.
  • the antibody variable genes also can be isolated by RNA extraction of a hybridoma line and the antibody genes obtained by RT-PCR and cloned into an immunoglobulin expression vector.
  • combinatorial immunoglobulin phagemid libraries are prepared from RNA isolated from the cell lines and phagemids expressing appropriate antibodies are selected by panning using viral antigens.
  • Monoclonal antibodies produced by any means may be purified, if desired, using filtration, centrifugation, and various chromatographic methods, such as FPLC or affinity chromatography. Fragments of the monoclonal antibodies of the disclosure can be obtained from the purified monoclonal antibodies by methods that include digestion with enzymes, such as pepsin or papain, and/or by cleavage of disulfide bonds by chemical reduction. Alternatively, monoclonal antibody fragments encompassed by the present disclosure can be synthesized using an automated peptide synthesizer.
  • the antibodies of the present disclosure may be purified.
  • purified is intended to refer to a composition, isolatable from other components, wherein the protein is purified to any degree relative to its naturally obtainable state.
  • a purified protein therefore also refers to a protein, free from the environment in which it may naturally occur.
  • substantially purified is used, this designation will refer to a composition in which the protein or peptide forms the major component of the composition, such as constituting about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90%, about 95% or more of the proteins in the composition.
  • Protein purification techniques are well known to those of skill in the art. These techniques involve, at one level, the crude fractionation of the cellular milieu to polypeptide and non-polypeptide fractions. Having separated the polypeptide from other proteins, the polypeptide of interest may be further purified using chromatographic and electrophoretic techniques to achieve partial or complete purification (or purification to homogeneity). Analytical methods particularly suited to the preparation of a pure peptide are ion-exchange chromatography, exclusion chromatography; polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis; isoelectric focusing.
  • protein purification include, precipitation with ammonium sulfate, PEG, antibodies and the like or by heat denaturation, followed by centrifugation; gel filtration, reverse phase, hydroxylapatite and affinity chromatography; and combinations of such and other techniques.
  • polypeptide in a prokaryotic or eukaryotic expression system and extract the protein using denaturing conditions.
  • the polypeptide may be purified from other cellular components using an affinity column, which binds to a tagged portion of the polypeptide.
  • affinity column which binds to a tagged portion of the polypeptide.
  • antibodies are fractionated utilizing agents (i.e., protein A) that bind the Fc portion of the antibody.
  • agents i.e., protein A
  • antigens may be used to simultaneously purify and select appropriate antibodies.
  • Such methods often utilize the selection agent bound to a support, such as a column, filter or bead.
  • the antibodies are bound to a support, contaminants removed (e.g., washed away), and the antibodies released by applying conditions (salt, heat, etc.).
  • sequences of antibodies may be modified for a variety of reasons, such as improved expression, improved cross-reactivity, or diminished off-target binding. Modified antibodies may be made by any technique known to those of skill in the art, including expression through standard molecular biological techniques, or the chemical synthesis of polypeptides.
  • hydropathic index of amino acids may be considered.
  • the importance of the hydropathic amino acid index in conferring interactive biologic function on a protein is generally understood in the art (Kyte and Doolittle, 1982). It is accepted that the relative hydropathic character of the amino acid contributes to the secondary structure of the resultant protein, which in turn defines the interaction of the protein with other molecules, for example, enzymes, substrates, receptors, DNA, antibodies, antigens, and the like.
  • Patent 4,554,101 the following hydrophilicity values have been assigned to amino acid residues: basic amino acids: arginine (+3.0), lysine (+3.0), and histidine (-0.5); acidic amino acids: aspartate (+3.0 + 1), glutamate (+3.0 + 1), asparagine (+0.2), and glutamine (+0.2); hydrophilic, nonionic amino acids: serine (+0.3), asparagine (+0.2), glutamine (+0.2), and threonine (-0.4), sulfur containing amino acids: cysteine (-1.0) and methionine (-1.3); hydrophobic, nonaromatic amino acids: valine (-1.5), leucine (-1.8), isoleucine (-1.8), proline (-0.5 + 1), alanine (-0.5), and glycine (0); hydrophobic, aromatic amino acids: tryptophan (- 3.4), phenylalanine (-2.5), and tyrosine (-2.3).
  • amino acid can be substituted for another having a similar hydrophilicity and produce a biologically or immunologically modified protein.
  • substitution of amino acids whose hydrophilicity values are within + 2 is preferred, those that are within + 1 are particularly preferred, and those within + 0.5 are even more particularly preferred.
  • Amino acid substitutions generally are based on the relative similarity of the amino acid side-chain substituents, for example, their hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, charge, size, and the like.
  • substitutions that take into consideration the various foregoing characteristics are well known to those of skill in the art and include: arginine and lysine; glutamate and aspartate; serine and threonine; glutamine and asparagine; and valine, leucine and isoleucine.
  • the present disclosure also contemplates isotype modification.
  • isotype modification By modifying the Fc region to have a different isotype, different functionalities can be achieved. For example, changing to IgGi can increase antibody dependent cell cytotoxicity, switching to class A can improve tissue distribution, and switching to class M can improve valency.
  • effector functions are responsible for activating or diminishing a biological activity (e.g., in a subject). Examples of effector functions include, but are not limited to: Clq binding; complement dependent cytotoxicity (CDC); Fc receptor binding; antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity (ADCC); phagocytosis; down regulation of cell surface receptors (e.g., B cell receptor; BCR), etc.
  • Such effector functions may require the Fc region to be combined with a binding domain (e.g., an antibody variable domain) and can be assessed using various assays (e.g., Fc binding assays, ADCC assays, CDC assays, etc.).
  • a binding domain e.g., an antibody variable domain
  • assays e.g., Fc binding assays, ADCC assays, CDC assays, etc.
  • a variant Fc region of an antibody with improved Clq binding and improved FcyRIII binding e.g., having both improved ADCC activity and improved CDC activity.
  • a variant Fc region can be engineered with reduced CDC activity and/or reduced ADCC activity.
  • only one of these activities may be increased, and, optionally, also the other activity reduced (e.g., to generate an Fc region variant with improved ADCC activity, but reduced CDC activity and vice versa).
  • An isolated monoclonal antibody, or antigen binding fragment thereof may contain a substantially homogeneous glycan without sialic acid, galactose, or fucose.
  • the aforementioned substantially homogeneous glycan may be covalently attached to the heavy chain constant region.
  • a monoclonal antibody may have a novel Fc glycosylation pattern. Glycosylation of an Fc region is typically either N-linked or O-linked. N-linked refers to the attachment of the carbohydrate moiety to the side chain of an asparagine residue.
  • O-linked glycosylation refers to the attachment of one of the sugars N-acetylgalactosamine, galactose, or xylose to a hydroxyamino acid, most commonly serine or threonine, although 5- hydroxyproline or 5-hydroxylysine may also be used.
  • the recognition sequences for enzymatic attachment of the carbohydrate moiety to the asparagine side chain peptide sequences are asparagine-X-serine and asparagine-X-threonine, where X is any amino acid except proline.
  • the glycosylation pattern may be altered, for example, by deleting one or more glycosylation site(s) found in the polypeptide, and/or adding one or more glycosylation site(s) that are not present in the polypeptide.
  • Addition of glycosylation sites to the Fc region of an antibody is conveniently accomplished by altering the amino acid sequence such that it contains one or more of the above-described tripeptide sequences (for N-linked glycosylation sites).
  • An exemplary glycosylation variant has an amino acid substitution of residue Asn 297 of the heavy chain.
  • the alteration may also be made by the addition of, or substitution by, one or more serine or threonine residues to the sequence of the original polypeptide (for O-linked glycosylation sites). Additionally, a change of Asn 297 to Ala can remove one of the glycosylation sites.
  • the isolated monoclonal antibody, or antigen binding fragment thereof may be present in a substantially homogenous composition represented by the GNGN or G1/G2 glycoform, which exhibits increased binding affinity for Fc gamma RI and Fc gamma RIII compared to the same antibody without the substantially homogeneous GNGN glycoform and with GO, GIF, G2F, GNF, GNGNF or GNGNFX containing glycoforms.
  • Fc glycosylation plays a significant role in anti-viral and anti-cancer properties of therapeutic mAbs. Elimination of core fucose dramatically improves the ADCC activity of mAbs mediated by natural killer (NK) cells but appears to have the opposite effect on the ADCC activity of polymorphonuclear cells (PMNs).
  • the isolated monoclonal antibody, or antigen binding fragment thereof may be expressed in cells that express beta (l,4)-N-acetylglucosaminyltransferase III (GnT III), such that GnT III adds GlcNAc to the antibody.
  • GnT III beta (l,4)-N-acetylglucosaminyltransferase III
  • Methods for producing antibodies in such a fashion are provided in WO/9954342 and WO/03011878.
  • Cell lines can be altered to enhance or reduce or eliminate certain post- translational modifications, such as glycosylation, using genome editing technology such as Clustered Regularly Interspaced Short Palindromic Repeats (CRISPR).
  • CRISPR technology can be used to eliminate genes encoding glycosylating enzymes in 293 or CHO cells used to express monoclonal antibodies.
  • Such motifs can be eliminated by altering the synthetic gene comprising the cDNA encoding the antibodies.
  • Antibodies can be engineered to enhance solubility.
  • some hydrophilic residues such as aspartic acid, glutamic acid, and serine contribute significantly more favorably to protein solubility than other hydrophilic residues, such as asparagine, glutamine, threonine, lysine, and arginine.
  • rHL Relative Human Likeness
  • Antibodies according to the present disclosure may be defined, in the first instance, by their binding specificity. Those of skill in the art, by assessing the binding specificity/affinity of a given antibody using techniques well known to those of skill in the art, can determine whether such antibodies fall within the scope of the instant claims.
  • the epitope to which a given antibody binds may consist of a single contiguous sequence of 3 or more (e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8. 9. 10, 11. 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20) amino acids located within the antigen molecule (e.g., a linear epitope in a domain).
  • the epitope may consist of a plurality of non-contiguous amino acids (or amino acid sequences) located within the antigen molecule (e.g., a conformational epitope).
  • Various techniques known to persons of ordinary skill in the art can be used to determine whether an antibody “interacts with one or more amino acids” within a polypeptide or protein.
  • Exemplary techniques include, for example, routine cross-blocking assays, such as that described in Antibodies, Harlow and Lane (Cold Spring Harbor Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.). Cross-blocking can be measured in various binding assays such as ELISA, biolayer interferometry, or surface plasmon resonance. Other methods include alanine scanning mutational analysis, peptide blot analysis (Reineke (2004) Methods Mol. Biol.
  • peptide cleavage analysis high-resolution electron microscopy techniques using single particle reconstruction, cryoEM, or tomography, crystallographic studies and NMR analysis.
  • methods such as epitope excision, epitope extraction and chemical modification of antigens can be employed (Tomer (2000) Prot. Sci. 9: 487-496).
  • Another method that can be used to identify the amino acids within a polypeptide with which an antibody interacts is hydrogen/deu terium exchange detected by mass spectrometry.
  • the hydrogen/deuterium exchange method involves deuterium-labeling the protein of interest, followed by binding the antibody to the deuterium-labeled protein.
  • the protein/antibody complex is transferred to water and exchangeable protons within amino acids that are protected by the antibody complex undergo deuterium-to-hydrogen back- exchange at a slower rate than exchangeable protons within amino acids that are not part of the interface.
  • amino acids that form part of the protein/antibody interface may retain deuterium and therefore exhibit relatively higher mass compared to amino acids not included in the interface.
  • the target protein is subjected to protease cleavage and mass spectrometry analysis, thereby revealing the deuterium-labeled residues which correspond to the specific amino acids with which the antibody interacts. See, e.g., Ehring (1999) Analytical Biochemistry 267: 252-259; Engen and Smith (2001) Anal. Chem. 73: 256A-265A.
  • epitope refers to a site on an antigen to which B and/or T cells respond.
  • B-cell epitopes can be formed both from contiguous amino acids or noncontiguous amino acids juxtaposed by tertiary folding of a protein. Epitopes formed from contiguous amino acids are typically retained on exposure to denaturing solvents, whereas epitopes formed by tertiary folding are typically lost on treatment with denaturing solvents.
  • An epitope typically includes at least 3, and more usually, at least 5 or 8-10 amino acids in a unique spatial conformation.
  • Modification-Assisted Profiling also known as Antigen Structure-based Antibody Profiling (ASAP) is a method that categorizes large numbers of monoclonal antibodies directed against the same antigen according to the similarities of the binding profile of each antibody to chemically or enzymatically modified antigen surfaces (see US 2004/0101920, herein specifically incorporated by reference in its entirety). Each category may reflect a unique epitope either distinctly different from or partially overlapping with epitope represented by another category. This technology allows rapid filtering of genetically identical antibodies, such that characterization can be focused on genetically distinct antibodies.
  • MAP may facilitate identification of rare hybridoma clones that produce monoclonal antibodies having the desired characteristics.
  • MAP may be used to sort the antibodies of the disclosure into groups of antibodies binding different epitopes.
  • the present disclosure includes antibodies that may bind to the same epitope, or a portion of the same epitope.
  • the above-described binding methodology is performed in two orientations: In a first orientation, the disclosed antibody is allowed to bind to an SARS-CoV-2 spike protein under saturating conditions followed by assessment of binding of the test antibody to the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein. In a second orientation, the test antibody is allowed to bind to a SARS-CoV-2 spike protein under saturating conditions followed by assessment of binding of the disclosed antibody to the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein.
  • test antibody and the disclosed antibody compete for binding to the S ARS- CoV-2 spike protein.
  • a test antibody that competes for binding with a disclosed antibody may not necessarily bind to the identical epitope as the disclosed antibody, but may sterically block binding of the disclosed antibody by binding an overlapping or adjacent epitope.
  • Two antibodies bind to the same or overlapping epitope if each competitively inhibits (blocks) binding of the other to the antigen. That is, a 1-, 5-, 10-, 20- or 100-fold excess of one antibody inhibits binding of the other by at least 50% but preferably 75%, 90%, or even 99% as measured in a competitive binding assay (see, e.g., Junghans et al., Cancer Res. 1990 50:1495-1502).
  • two antibodies have the same epitope if essentially all amino acid mutations in the antigen that reduce or eliminate binding of one antibody reduce or eliminate binding of the other.
  • Two antibodies have overlapping epitopes if some amino acid mutations that reduce or eliminate binding of one antibody reduce or eliminate binding of the other.
  • Additional routine experimentation e.g., peptide mutation and binding analyses
  • peptide mutation and binding analyses can then be carried out to confirm whether the observed lack of binding of the test antibody is in fact due to binding to the same epitope as the reference antibody or if steric blocking (or another phenomenon) is responsible for the lack of observed binding.
  • steric blocking or another phenomenon
  • this sort can be performed using ELISA, RIA, surface plasmon resonance, flow cytometry or any other quantitative or qualitative antibody-binding assay available in the art.
  • the antibodies may be defined by their variable sequence, which include additional “framework” regions. These are provided in Table 3 that represent full variable regions.
  • the antibodies sequences may vary from these sequences, optionally using methods discussed in greater detail below.
  • nucleic acid sequences may vary from those set out above in that (a) the variable regions may be segregated away from the constant domains of the light and heavy chains, (b) the nucleic acids may vary from those set out above while not affecting the residues encoded thereby, (c) the nucleic acids may vary from those set out above by a given percentage, e.g., 10%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% homology, (d) the nucleic acids may vary from those set out above by virtue of the ability to hybridize under high stringency conditions, as exemplified by low salt and/or high temperature conditions, such as provided by about 0.02 M to about
  • two sequences are said to be “identical” if the sequence of nucleotides or amino acids in the two sequences is the same when aligned for maximum correspondence, as described below. Comparisons between two sequences are typically performed by comparing the sequences over a comparison window to identify and compare local regions of sequence similarity.
  • a “comparison window” as used herein refers to a segment of at least about 20 contiguous positions, usually 30 to about 75, 40 to about 50, in which a sequence may be compared to a reference sequence of the same number of contiguous positions after the two sequences are optimally aligned.
  • Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison may be conducted using the Megalign program in the Lasergene suite of bioinformatics software (DNASTAR, Inc., Madison, Wis.), using default parameters.
  • optimal alignment of sequences for comparison may be conducted by the local identity algorithm of Smith and Waterman (1981) Add. APL. Math 2:482, by the identity alignment algorithm of Needleman and Wunsch (1970) J. Mol. Biol. 48:443, by the search for similarity methods of Pearson and Lipman (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • BLAST and BLAST 2.0 are described in Altschul et al. (1977) Nucl. Acids Res. 25:3389-3402 and Altschul et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410, respectively.
  • BLAST and BLAST 2.0 can be used, for example with the parameters described herein, to determine percent sequence identity for the polynucleotides and polypeptides of the disclosure.
  • Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information. The rearranged nature of an antibody sequence and the variable length of each gene requires multiple rounds of BLAST searches for a single antibody sequence.
  • IgBLAST (world- wide-web at ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/igblast/) identifies matches to the germline V, D and J genes, details at rearrangement junctions, the delineation of Ig V domain framework regions and complementarity determining regions.
  • IgBLAST can analyze nucleotide or protein sequences and can process sequences in batches and allows searches against the germline gene databases and other sequence databases simultaneously to minimize the chance of missing possibly the best matching germline V gene.
  • germline nucleic acid residue is meant the nucleic acid residue that naturally occurs in a germline gene encoding a constant or variable region.
  • “Germline gene” is the DNA found in a germ cell (z.e. , a cell destined to become an egg or in the sperm).
  • a “germline mutation” refers to a heritable change in a particular DNA that has occurred in a germ cell or the zygote at the single-cell stage, and when transmitted to offspring, such a mutation is incorporated in every cell of the body.
  • a germline mutation is in contrast to a somatic mutation which is acquired in a single body cell.
  • nucleotides in a germline DNA sequence encoding for a variable region are mutated (i.e., a somatic mutation) and replaced with a different nucleotide.
  • the “percentage of sequence identity” is determined by comparing two optimally aligned sequences over a window of comparison of at least 20 positions, wherein the portion of the polynucleotide or polypeptide sequence in the comparison window may comprise additions or deletions (i.e., gaps) of 20 percent or less, usually 5 to 15 percent, or 10 to 12 percent, as compared to the reference sequences (which does not comprise additions or deletions) for optimal alignment of the two sequences.
  • the percentage is calculated by determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid bases or amino acid residues occur in both sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the reference sequence (i.e. , the window size) and multiplying the results by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity.
  • an antibody derivative of any of the antibodies provided herein and their antigen-binding fragments.
  • a derivative antibody or antibody fragment may be modified by chemical modifications using techniques known to those of skill in the art, including, but not limited to, specific chemical cleavage, acetylation, formulation, metabolic synthesis of tunicamycin, etc.
  • an antibody derivative will possess a similar or identical function as the parental antibody.
  • an antibody derivative will exhibit an altered activity relative to the parental antibody.
  • a derivative antibody (or fragment thereof) can bind to its epitope more tightly or be more resistant to proteolysis than the parental antibody.
  • derivative refers to an antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof that immunospecifically binds to an antigen but which comprises, one, two, three, four, five or more amino acid substitutions, additions, deletions or modifications relative to a “parental” (or wild-type) molecule. Such amino acid substitutions or additions may introduce naturally occurring (i.e., DNA-encoded) or non- naturally occurring amino acid residues.
  • derivative encompasses, for example, as variants having altered CHI, hinge, CH2, CH3 or CH4 regions, so as to form, for example antibodies, etc., having variant Fc regions that exhibit enhanced or impaired effector or binding characteristics.
  • derivative additionally encompasses non-amino acid modifications, for example, amino acids that may be glycosylated (e.g., have altered mannose, 2-N-acetylglucosamine, galactose, fucose, glucose, sialic acid, 5-N-acetylneuraminic acid, 5 -glycolneuraminic acid, etc. content), acetylated, pegylated, phosphorylated, amidated, derivatized by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linked to a cellular ligand or other protein, etc.
  • non-amino acid modifications for example, amino acids that may be glycosylated (e.g., have altered mannose, 2-N-acetylglucosamine, galactose, fucose, glucose, sialic acid, 5-N-acetylneuraminic acid, 5 -glycolneuraminic acid, etc. content), acetylated, pegy
  • the altered carbohydrate modifications modulate one or more of the following: solubilization of the antibody, facilitation of subcellular transport and secretion of the antibody, promotion of antibody assembly, conformational integrity, and antibody- mediated effector function.
  • the altered carbohydrate modifications enhance antibody mediated effector function relative to the antibody lacking the carbohydrate modification. Carbohydrate modifications that lead to altered antibody mediated effector function are well known in the art.
  • a derivative antibody or antibody fragment can be generated with an engineered sequence or glycosylation state to confer preferred levels of activity in antibody dependent cellular cytotoxicity (ADCC), antibody-dependent cellular phagocytosis (ADCP), antibody-dependent neutrophil phagocytosis (ADNP), or antibody-dependent complement deposition (ADCD) functions as measured by bead-based or cell-based assays or in vivo studies in animal models.
  • ADCC antibody dependent cellular cytotoxicity
  • ADCP antibody-dependent cellular phagocytosis
  • ADNP antibody-dependent neutrophil phagocytosis
  • ADCD antibody-dependent complement deposition
  • a derivative antibody or antibody fragment may be modified by chemical modifications using techniques known to those of skill in the art, including, but not limited to, specific chemical cleavage, acetylation, formulation, metabolic synthesis of tunicamycin, etc.
  • an antibody derivative will possess a similar or identical function as the parental antibody.
  • an antibody derivative will exhibit an altered activity relative to the parental antibody.
  • a derivative antibody (or fragment thereof) can bind to its epitope more tightly or be more resistant to proteolysis than the parental antibody.
  • Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC) measures the heat capacity, C p , of a molecule (the heat required to warm it, per degree) as a function of temperature.
  • C p the heat capacity of a molecule (the heat required to warm it, per degree) as a function of temperature.
  • DSC Differential Scanning Calorimetry
  • C p heat capacity of a molecule (the heat required to warm it, per degree) as a function of temperature.
  • DSC data for mAbs is particularly interesting because it sometimes resolves the unfolding of individual domains within the mAh structure, producing up to three peaks in the thermogram (from unfolding of the Fab, CH2, and CH3 domains). Typically unfolding of the Fab domain produces the strongest peak.
  • the DSC profiles and relative stability of the Fc portion show characteristic differences for the human IgGi, IgG2, IgGa, and IgG4 subclasses (Garber and Demarest, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 355, 751-757, 2007).
  • CD circular dichroism
  • Far-UV CD spectra will be measured for antibodies in the range of 200 to 260 nm at increments of 0.5 nm. The final spectra can be determined as averages of 20 accumulations. Residue ellipticity values can be calculated after background subtraction.
  • DLS dynamic light scattering
  • DLS measurements of a sample can show whether the particles aggregate over time or with temperature variation by determining whether the hydrodynamic radius of the particle increases. If particles aggregate, one can see a larger population of particles with a larger radius. Stability depending on temperature can be analyzed by controlling the temperature in situ.
  • Capillary electrophoresis (CE) techniques include proven methodologies for determining features of antibody stability. One can use an iCE approach to resolve antibody protein charge variants due to deamidation, C-terminal lysines, sialylation, oxidation, glycosylation, and any other change to the protein that can result in a change in pl of the protein.
  • Each of the expressed antibody proteins can be evaluated by high throughput, free solution isoelectric focusing (IEF) in a capillary column (cIEF), using a Protein Simple Maurice instrument.
  • IEF free solution isoelectric focusing
  • cIEF capillary column
  • Whole-column UV absorption detection can be performed every 30 seconds for real time monitoring of molecules focusing at the isoelectric points (pls).
  • This approach combines the high resolution of traditional gel IEF with the advantages of quantitation and automation found in column-based separations while eliminating the need for a mobilization step.
  • the technique yields reproducible, quantitative analysis of identity, purity, and heterogeneity profiles for the expressed antibodies.
  • the results identify charge heterogeneity and molecular sizing on the antibodies, with both absorbance and native fluorescence detection modes and with sensitivity of detection down to 0.7 pg/mL.
  • the intrinsic solubility scores can be calculated using CamSol Intrinsic (Sormanni et al., J Mol Biol 427, 478-490, 2015).
  • the amino acid sequences for residues 95-102 (Kabat numbering) in HCDR3 of each antibody fragment such as a scFv can be evaluated via the online program to calculate the solubility scores.
  • autoreactive clones should be eliminated during ontogeny by negative selection; however, it has become clear that many human naturally occurring antibodies with autoreactive properties persist in adult mature repertoires, and the autoreactivity may enhance the antiviral function of many antibodies to pathogens. It has been noted that HCDR3 loops in antibodies during early B cell development are often rich in positive charge and exhibit autoreactive patterns (Wardemann et al., Science 301, 1374-1377, 2003).
  • autoreactivity also can be surveyed using assessment of binding to tissues in tissue arrays.
  • Chimeric antigen receptor (CAR) molecules are recombinant fusion protein and are distinguished by their ability to both bind antigen and transduce activation signals via immunoreceptor activation motifs (ITAMs) present in their cytoplasmic tails in order to activate genetically modified immune effector cells for killing, proliferation, and cytokine production.
  • Receptor constructs utilizing an antigen-binding moiety afford the additional advantage of being “universal” in that they bind native antigen on the target cell surface in an HLA-independent fashion.
  • Embodiments of the CARs described herein include nucleic acids encoding an antigen-specific CAR polypeptide comprising an intracellular signaling domain, a transmembrane domain, and an extracellular domain comprising an antigen-binding domain.
  • a CAR may recognize an epitope comprised of the shared space between one or more antigens.
  • a CAR can comprise a hinge domain positioned between the transmembrane domain and the antigen binding domain.
  • a CAR may further comprise a signal peptide that directs expression of the CAR to the cell surface.
  • a CAR may comprise a signal peptide from GM-CSF.
  • a CAR may also be co-expressed with a membrane-bound cytokine to improve persistence.
  • a CAR may be co-expressed with membrane-bound IL- 15.
  • immune effector cells expressing the CAR may have different levels activity against target cells. Different CAR sequences may be introduced into immune effector cells to generate engineered cells, the engineered cells selected for elevated SRC, and the selected cells tested for activity to identify the CAR constructs predicted to have the greatest therapeutic efficacy.
  • a chimeric antigen receptor can be produced by any means known in the art, though preferably it is produced using recombinant DNA techniques.
  • a nucleic acid sequence encoding the several regions of the chimeric antigen receptor can be prepared and assembled into a complete coding sequence by standard techniques of molecular cloning (genomic library screening, PCR, primer-assisted ligation, scFv libraries from yeast and bacteria, site-directed mutagenesis, etc.).
  • the resulting coding region can be inserted into an expression vector and used to transform a suitable expression host allogeneic or autologous immune effector cells, such as a T cell or an NK cell.
  • the chimeric construct may be introduced into immune effector cells as naked DNA or in a suitable vector.
  • Methods of stably transfecting cells by electroporation using naked DNA are known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,410,319.
  • naked DNA generally refers to the DNA encoding a chimeric receptor contained in a plasmid expression vector in proper orientation for expression.
  • a viral vector e.g., a retroviral vector, adenoviral vector, adeno-associated viral vector, or lentiviral vector
  • a retroviral vector e.g., a retroviral vector, adenoviral vector, adeno-associated viral vector, or lentiviral vector
  • Suitable vectors for use in accordance with the method of the present invention are non-replicating in the immune effector cells.
  • a large number of vectors are known that are based on viruses, where the copy number of the virus maintained in the cell is low enough to maintain the viability of the cell, such as, for example, vectors based on HIV, SV40, EBV, HSV, or BPV.
  • An antigen binding domain may comprise complementary determining regions of a monoclonal antibody, variable regions of a monoclonal antibody, and/or antigen binding fragments thereof.
  • the antigen binding regions or domains may comprise a fragment of the VH and VL chains of a single-chain variable fragment (scFv) derived from a particular human monoclonal antibody.
  • the fragment can also be any number of different antigen binding domains of an antigen- specific antibody.
  • the fragment may be an antigen-specific scFv encoded by a sequence that is optimized for human codon usage for expression in human cells.
  • VH and VL domains of a CAR are separated by a linker sequence, such as a Whitlow linker.
  • the prototypical CAR encodes a scFv comprising VH and VL domains derived from one monoclonal antibody (mAb), coupled to a transmembrane domain and one or more cytoplasmic signaling domains (e.g. costimulatory domains and signaling domains).
  • a CAR may comprise the LCDR1-3 sequences and the HCDR1-3 sequences of an antibody that binds to SARS-CoV-2 spike protein.
  • a CAR that comprises: (1) the HCDRL3 sequences of a first antibody that binds to the antigen; and (2) the LCDR1-3 sequences of a second antibody that binds to the antigen.
  • a CAR that comprises HCDR and LCDR sequences from two different antigen binding antibodies may have the advantage of preferential binding to particular conformations of an antigen (e.g., conformations preferentially associated with cancer cells versus normal tissue).
  • a CAR may be engineered using VH and VL chains derived from different mAbs to generate a panel of CAR+ immune effector cells.
  • the antigen binding domain of a CAR may contain any combination of the LCDR1-3 sequences of a first antibody and the HCDR1-3 sequences of a second antibody.
  • a CAR polypeptide may include a hinge domain positioned between the antigen binding domain and the transmembrane domain.
  • a hinge domain may be included in CAR polypeptides to provide adequate distance between the antigen binding domain and the cell surface or to alleviate possible steric hindrance that could adversely affect antigen binding or effector function of CAR-modified immune effector cells.
  • the hinge domain may comprise a sequence that binds to an Fc receptor, such as FcyR2a or FcyRla.
  • the hinge sequence may comprise an Fc domain from a human immunoglobulin e.g., IgGl, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgAl, IgA2, IgM, IgD or IgE) that binds to an Fc receptor.
  • a human immunoglobulin e.g., IgGl, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgAl, IgA2, IgM, IgD or IgE
  • a CAR hinge domain may be derived from human immunoglobulin (Ig) constant region or a portion thereof including the Ig hinge, or from human CD8 a transmembrane domain and CD8a-hinge region.
  • a CAR hinge domain may comprise a hinge-CH2-CH3 region of antibody isotype IgG4.
  • the hinge domain (and/or the CAR) may not comprise a wild type human IgG4 CH2 and CH3 sequence. Point mutations may be introduced in antibody heavy chain CH2 domain to reduce glycosylation and non-specific Fc gamma receptor binding of CAR-modified immune effector cells.
  • a CAR hinge domain may comprise an Ig Fc domain that comprises at least one mutation relative to wild type Ig Fc domain that reduces Fc -receptor binding.
  • the CAR hinge domain can comprise an IgG4-Fc domain that comprises at least one mutation relative to wild type IgG4-Fc domain that reduces Fc-receptor binding.
  • a CAR hinge domain may comprise an IgG4-Fc domain having a mutation (such as an amino acid deletion or substitution) at a position corresponding to L235 and/or N297 relative to the wild type IgG4-Fc sequence.
  • a CAR hinge domain can comprise an IgG4-Fc domain having a L235E and/or a N297Q mutation relative to the wild type IgG4-Fc sequence.
  • a CAR hinge domain may comprise an IgG4-Fc domain having an amino acid substitution at position L235 for an amino acid that is hydrophilic, such as R, H, K, D, E, S, T, N or Q, or that has similar properties to an “E,” such as D.
  • a CAR hinge domain may comprise an IgG4-Fc domain having an amino acid substitution at position N297 for an amino acid that has similar properties to a “Q,” such as S or T.
  • the hinge domain may comprise a sequence that is about 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100% identical to an IgG4 hinge domain, a CD8a hinge domain, a CD28 hinge domain, or an engineered hinge domain.
  • the antigen-specific extracellular domain and the intracellular signaling-domain may be linked by a transmembrane domain.
  • Polypeptide sequences that can be used as part of transmembrane domain include, without limitation, the human CD4 transmembrane domain, the human CD28 transmembrane domain, the transmembrane human CD3 ⁇ domain, a cysteine mutated human CD3 domain, or other transmembrane domains from other human transmembrane signaling proteins, such as CD16, CD8, and erythropoietin receptor.
  • the transmembrane domain may comprise a sequence at least 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100% identical to one of those provided in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2014/0274909 (e.g. a CD8 and/or a CD28 transmembrane domain) or U.S. Patent No. 8,906,682 (e.g. a CD8a transmembrane domain), both incorporated herein by reference.
  • Transmembrane regions may be derived from (i.e.
  • the transmembrane domain can be 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100% identical to a CD8a transmembrane domain or a CD28 transmembrane domain.
  • the intracellular signaling domain of a CAR is responsible for activation of at least one of the normal effector functions of the immune cell engineered to express the CAR.
  • effector function refers to a specialized function of a differentiated cell. Effector function of a T cell, for example, may be cytolytic activity or helper activity including the secretion of cytokines. Effector function in a naive, memory, or memory-type T cell includes antigen-dependent proliferation.
  • intracellular signaling domain refers to the portion of a protein that transduces the effector function signal and directs the cell to perform a specialized function.
  • the intracellular signaling domain may be derived from the intracellular signaling domain of a native receptor.
  • Examples of such native receptors include the zeta chain of the T-cell receptor or any of its homologs (e.g., eta, delta, gamma, or epsilon), MB1 chain, B29, Fc RIII, Fc RI, and combinations of signaling molecules, such as CD3 ⁇ and CD28, CD27, 4-1BB/CD137, ICOS/CD278, IL-2RP/CD122, IL-2Rot/CD132, DAP10, DAP12, CD40, OX40/CD134, and combinations thereof, as well as other similar molecules and fragments. Intracellular signaling portions of other members of the families of activating proteins can be used.
  • intracellular signaling domain While the entire intracellular signaling domain may be employed, in many cases it will not be necessary to use the entire intracellular polypeptide. To the extent that a truncated portion of the intracellular signaling domain may find use, such truncated portion may be used in place of the intact chain as long as it still transduces the effector function signal.
  • intracellular signaling domain is thus meant to include a truncated portion of the intracellular signaling domain sufficient to transduce the effector function signal, upon CAR binding to a target.
  • the intracellular signaling domain comprises a sequence 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100% identical to a CD3 ⁇ intracellular domain, a CD28 intracellular domain, a CD137 intracellular domain, or a domain comprising a CD28 intracellular domain fused to the 4-1BB intracellular domain.
  • Immune effectors cells may be T cells (e.g., regulatory T cells, CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, or gamma-delta T cells), natural killer (NK) cells, invariant NK cells, or NKT cells. Also provided herein are methods of producing and engineering the immune effector cells as well as methods of using and administering the cells for adoptive cell therapy, in which case the cells may be autologous or allogeneic. Thus, the immune effector cells may be used as immunotherapy, such as to target cancer cells.
  • the immune effector cells may be isolated from subjects, particularly human subjects.
  • the immune effector cells can be obtained from a subject of interest, such as a subject suspected of having a particular disease or condition, a subject suspected of having a predisposition to a particular disease or condition, a subject who is undergoing therapy for a particular disease or condition, a subject who is a healthy volunteer or healthy donor, or from a blood bank.
  • Immune effector cells can be collected, enriched, and/or purified from any tissue or organ in which they reside in the subject including, but not limited to, blood, cord blood, spleen, thymus, lymph nodes, bone marrow, tissues removed and/or exposed during surgical procedures, and tissues obtained via biopsy procedures.
  • the isolated immune effector cells may be used directly, or they can be stored for a period of time, such as by freezing.
  • Tissues/organs from which the immune effector cells are enriched, isolated, and/or purified may be isolated from both living and non-living subjects, wherein the non-living subjects are organ donors.
  • Immune effector cells isolated from cord blood may have enhanced immunomodulation capacity, such as measured by CD4- or CD8-positive T cell suppression.
  • the immune effector cells may be isolated from pooled blood, particularly pooled cord blood, for enhanced immunomodulation capacity.
  • the pooled blood may be from 2 or more sources, such as 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 , 8, 9, 10 or more sources (e.g., donor subjects).
  • the population of immune cells can be obtained from a subject in need of therapy or suffering from a disease associated with reduced immune effector cell activity. Thus, the cells will be autologous to the subject in need of therapy.
  • the population of immune effector cells can be obtained from a donor, preferably an allogeneic donor. Allogeneic donor cells may or may not be human-leukocyte-antigen (HLA)- compatible. To be rendered subject-compatible, allogeneic cells can be treated to reduce immunogenicity.
  • HLA human-leukocyte-antigen
  • the immune effector cells may be T cells.
  • the T cells may be derived from the blood, bone marrow, lymph, umbilical cord, or lymphoid organs.
  • the T cells may be human T cells.
  • the T cells typically are primary cells, such as those isolated directly from a subject and/or isolated from a subject and frozen.
  • the cells may include one or more subsets of T cells or other cell types, such as whole T cell populations, CD4 + cells, CD8 + cells, and subpopulations thereof, such as those defined by function, activation state, maturity, potential for differentiation, expansion, recirculation, localization, persistence capacities, antigenspecificity, type of antigen receptor, presence in a particular organ or compartment, marker or cytokine secretion profile, and/or degree of differentiation.
  • the cells may be allogeneic and/or autologous.
  • the cells may be derived from pluripotent and/or multipotent cells, such as stem cells, such as induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs).
  • pluripotent and/or multipotent cells such as stem cells, such as induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs).
  • T cells e.g., CD4 + and/or CD8 + T cells
  • TN naive T
  • TEFF effector T cells
  • memory T cells and sub-types thereof such as stem cell memory T (TSCM), central memory T (TCM), effector memory T (TEM), or terminally differentiated effector memory T cells, tumor-infiltrating lymphocytes (TIL), immature T cells, mature T cells, helper T cells, cytotoxic T cells, mucosa-associated invariant T (MAIT) cells, naturally occurring and adaptive regulatory T (Treg) cells, helper T cells, such as TH1 cells, TH2 cells, TH3 cells, TH17 cells, TH9 cells, TH22 cells, follicular helper T cells, alpha/beta T cells, and delta/gamma T cells.
  • TIL tumor-infiltrating lymphocytes
  • MAIT mucosa-associated invariant T
  • Reg adaptive regulatory T
  • helper T cells such as TH
  • One or more of the T cell populations may be enriched for or depleted of cells that are positive for a specific marker, such as surface markers, or that are negative for a specific marker.
  • a specific marker such as surface markers
  • such markers are those that are absent or expressed at relatively low levels on certain populations of T cells (e.g., non-memory cells) but are present or expressed at relatively higher levels on certain other populations of T cells (e.g., memory cells).
  • T cells may be separated from a PBMC sample by negative selection of markers expressed on non-T cells, such as B cells, monocytes, or other white blood cells, such as CD14.
  • a CD4 + or CD8 + selection step is used to separate CD4 + helper and CD8 + cytotoxic T cells.
  • Such CD4 + and CD8 + populations can be further sorted into sub-populations by positive or negative selection for markers expressed or expressed to a relatively higher degree on one or more naive, memory, and/or effector T cell subpopulations.
  • CD8 + T cells may be further enriched for or depleted of naive, central memory, effector memory, and/or central memory stem cells, such as by positive or negative selection based on surface antigens associated with the respective subpopulation.
  • Enrichment for central memory T (TCM) cells may be carried out to increase efficacy, such as to improve long-term survival, expansion, and/or engraftment following administration, which in some aspects is particularly robust in such sub-populations.
  • the T cells may be autologous T cells.
  • tumor samples are obtained from patients and a single cell suspension is obtained.
  • the single cell suspension can be obtained in any suitable manner, e.g., mechanically (disaggregating the tumor using, e.g., a gentleMACSTM Dissociator, Miltenyi Biotec, Auburn, Calif.) or enzymatically (e.g., collagenase or DNase).
  • Single-cell suspensions of tumor enzymatic digests are cultured in interleukin-2 (IL-2).
  • the cells are cultured until confluence (e.g., about 2xl0 6 lymphocytes), e.g., from about 5 to about 21 days, preferably from about 10 to about 14 days.
  • the cultured T cells can be pooled and rapidly expanded. Rapid expansion provides an increase in the number of antigen-specific T cells of at least about 50- fold (e.g., 50-, 60-, 70-, 80-, 90-, or 100-fold, or greater) over a period of about 10 to about 14 days. More preferably, rapid expansion provides an increase of at least about 200-fold (e.g., 200-, 300-, 400-, 500-, 600-, 700-, 800-, 900-, or greater) over a period of about 10 to about 14 days.
  • 50- fold e.g., 50-, 60-, 70-, 80-, 90-, or 100-fold, or greater
  • rapid expansion provides an increase of at least about 200-fold (e.g., 200-, 300-, 400-, 500-, 600-, 700-, 800-, 900-, or greater) over a period of about 10 to about 14 days.
  • T cells can be rapidly expanded using non-specific T-cell receptor stimulation in the presence of feeder lymphocytes and either interleukin-2 (IL-2) or interleukin- 15 (IL- 15), with IL-2 being preferred.
  • the non-specific T-cell receptor stimulus can include around 30 ng/ml of OKT3, a mouse monoclonal anti-CD3 antibody (available from Ortho-McNeil®, Raritan, N.J.).
  • T cells can be rapidly expanded by stimulation of peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC) in vitro with one or more antigens (including antigenic portions thereof, such as epitope(s), or a cell) of the cancer, which can be optionally expressed from a vector, such as a human leukocyte antigen A2 (HLA-A2) binding peptide, in the presence of a T-cell growth factor, such as 300 lU/ml IL-2 or IL-15, with IL-2 being preferred.
  • a vector such as a human leukocyte antigen A2 (HLA-A2) binding peptide
  • HLA-A2 human leukocyte antigen A2
  • T-cell growth factor such as 300 lU/ml IL-2 or IL-15, with IL-2 being preferred.
  • the in vz/ro-induced T-cells are rapidly expanded by re- stimulation with the same antigen(s) of the cancer pulsed onto HLA-A2-expressing antigen-presenting cells.
  • the T-cells can be re-stimulated with irradiated, autologous lymphocytes or with irradiated HLA-A2+ allogeneic lymphocytes and IL-2, for example.
  • the autologous T-cells can be modified to express a T-cell growth factor that promotes the growth and activation of the autologous T-cells.
  • Suitable T-cell growth factors include, for example, interleukin (IL)-2, IL-7, IL-15, and IL-12. Suitable methods of modification are known in the art.
  • modified autologous T-cells express the T-cell growth factor at high levels.
  • T-cell growth factor coding sequences such as that of IL- 12, are readily available in the art, as are promoters, the operable linkage of which to a T-cell growth factor coding sequence promote high-level expression.
  • the immune effector cells may be natural killer (NK) cells.
  • Natural killer (NK) cells are a subpopulation of lymphocytes that have spontaneous cytotoxicity against a variety of tumor cells, virus-infected cells, and some normal cells in the bone marrow and thymus. NK cells are critical effectors of the early innate immune response toward transformed and virus-infected cells. NK cells constitute about 10% of the lymphocytes in human peripheral blood. When lymphocytes are cultured in the presence of interleukin 2 (IL- 2), strong cytotoxic reactivity develops. NK cells are effector cells known as large granular lymphocytes because of their larger size and the presence of characteristic azurophilic granules in their cytoplasm.
  • IL-2 interleukin 2
  • NK cells differentiate and mature in the bone marrow, lymph nodes, spleen, tonsils, and thymus. NK cells can be detected by specific surface markers, such as CD16, CD56, and CD8 in humans. NK cells do not express T-cell antigen receptors, the pan T marker CD3, or surface immunoglobulin B cell receptors.
  • NK cells Stimulation of NK cells is achieved through a cross-talk of signals derived from cell surface activating and inhibitory receptors.
  • the activation status of NK cells is regulated by a balance of intracellular signals received from an array of germ-line- encoded activating and inhibitory receptors.
  • an abnormal cell e.g., tumor or virus -infected cell
  • activating signals predominate
  • the NK cells can rapidly induce apoptosis of the target cell through directed secretion of cytolytic granules containing perforin and granzymes or engagement of death domain-containing receptors.
  • Activated NK cells can also secrete type I cytokines, such as interferon-y, tumor necrosis factor-a and granulocyte-macrophage colony- stimulating factor (GM-CSF), which activate both innate and adaptive immune cells as well as other cytokines and. Production of these soluble factors by NK cells in early innate immune responses significantly influences the recruitment and function of other hematopoietic cells. Also, through physical contacts and production of cytokines, NK cells are central players in a regulatory crosstalk network with dendritic cells and neutrophils to promote or restrain immune responses.
  • type I cytokines such as interferon-y, tumor necrosis factor-a and granulocyte-macrophage colony- stimulating factor (GM-CSF)
  • GM-CSF granulocyte-macrophage colony- stimulating factor
  • NK cells may be derived from human peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC), unstimulated leukapheresis products (PBSC), human embryonic stem cells (hESCs), induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs), bone marrow, or umbilical cord blood by methods well known in the art.
  • PBMC peripheral blood mononuclear cells
  • hESCs human embryonic stem cells
  • iPSCs induced pluripotent stem cells
  • the NK cells are isolated and expanded ex vivo.
  • CB mononuclear cells may be isolated by ficoll density gradient centrifugation and cultured in a bioreactor with IL-2 and artificial antigen presenting cells (aAPCs). After 7 days, the cell culture may be depleted of any cells expressing CD3 and recultured for an additional 7 days.
  • aAPCs artificial antigen presenting cells
  • the cells may be again CD3 -depleted and characterized to determine the percentage of CD56 + /CD3‘ cells or NK cells.
  • umbilical CB may be used to derive NK cells by the isolation of CD34 + cells and differentiation into CD56VCD3’ cells by culturing in medium contain SCF, IL-7, IL-15, and IL-2.
  • the immune effectors cells may be genetically engineered to express antigen receptors such as chimeric antigen receptors (CARs).
  • CARs chimeric antigen receptors
  • the host cells e.g, autologous or allogeneic T-cells
  • NK cells are engineered to express a CAR.
  • Multiple CARs, such as to different antigens, may be added to a single cell type, such as T cells or NK cells.
  • the cells may comprise one or more nucleic acids introduced via genetic engineering that encode one or more antigen receptors, and genetically engineered products of such nucleic acids.
  • the nucleic acids may be heterologous, i.e., normally not present in a cell or sample obtained from the cell, such as one obtained from another organism or cell, which for example, is not ordinarily found in the cell being engineered and/or an organism from which such cell is derived.
  • the nucleic acids may not be naturally occurring, such as a nucleic acid not found in nature (e.g., chimeric).
  • compositions comprising antibodies that selectively target SARS-CoV-2 spike protein.
  • Such compositions comprise a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of an antibody or a fragment thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • pharmaceutical compositions and formulations comprising immune cells (e.g., T cells or NK cells) expressing a CAR and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • phrases “pharmaceutical or pharmacologically acceptable” refers to molecular entities and compositions that do not produce an adverse, allergic, or other untoward reaction when administered to an animal, such as a human, as appropriate.
  • the preparation of a pharmaceutical composition comprising an antibody or additional active ingredient will be known to those of skill in the art in light of the present disclosure.
  • animal (e.g., human) administration it will be understood that preparations should meet sterility, pyrogenicity, general safety, and purity standards as required by FDA Office of Biological Standards.
  • “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” includes any and all aqueous solvents (e.g., water, alcoholic/aqueous solutions, saline solutions, parenteral vehicles, such as sodium chloride, Ringer’s dextrose, etc.), non-aqueous solvents (e.g., propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, vegetable oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyloleate), dispersion media, coatings, surfactants, antioxidants, preservatives (e.g., antibacterial or antifungal agents, anti-oxidants, chelating agents, and inert gases), isotonic agents, absorption delaying agents, salts, drugs, drug stabilizers, gels, binders, excipients, disintegration agents, lubricants, sweetening agents, flavoring agents, dyes, fluid and nutrient replenishers, such like materials and combinations thereof, as would be known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • aqueous solvents e.g.
  • Water is a particular carrier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously.
  • Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions.
  • the pH and exact concentration of the various components in a pharmaceutical composition are adjusted according to well-known parameters.
  • the active ingredients can be formulated for parenteral administration, e.g., formulated for injection via the intravenous, intramuscular, sub-cutaneous, or even intraperitoneal routes.
  • such compositions can be prepared as either liquid solutions or suspensions; solid forms suitable for use to prepare solutions or suspensions upon the addition of a liquid prior to injection can also be prepared; and, the preparations can also be emulsified.
  • compositions of the present embodiments are advantageously administered in the form of injectable compositions either as liquid solutions or suspensions; solid forms suitable for solution in, or suspension in, liquid prior to injection may also be prepared. These preparations also may be emulsified.
  • the pharmaceutical forms suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions; formulations including sesame oil, peanut oil, or aqueous propylene glycol; and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions.
  • the form must be sterile and must be fluid to the extent that it may be easily injected. It also should be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms, such as bacteria and fungi.
  • the proteinaceous compositions may be formulated into a neutral or salt form.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include the acid addition salts (formed with the free amino groups of the protein) and which are formed with inorganic acids such as, for example, hydrochloric or phosphoric acids, or such organic acids as acetic, oxalic, tartaric, mandelic, and the like. Salts formed with the free carboxyl groups can also be derived from inorganic bases such as, for example, sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, or ferric hydroxides, and such organic bases as isopropylamine, trimethylamine, histidine, procaine and the like.
  • a pharmaceutical composition can include a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), suitable mixtures thereof, and vegetable oils.
  • a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), suitable mixtures thereof, and vegetable oils.
  • the proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion, and by the use of surfactants.
  • the prevention of the action of microorganisms can be brought about by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like.
  • isotonic agents for example, sugars or sodium chloride.
  • Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by the use in the compositions of agents delaying absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • compositions can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents.
  • These compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like.
  • Oral formulations can include standard carriers such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc. Examples of suitable pharmaceutical agents are described in Remington’s Pharmaceutical Sciences.
  • Such compositions will contain a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of the antibody or fragment thereof, preferably in purified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient.
  • Passive transfer of antibodies generally will involve the use of intravenous or intramuscular injections.
  • the forms of antibody can be as monoclonal antibodies.
  • Such immunity generally lasts for only a short period of time, and there is also a potential risk for hypersensitivity reactions, and serum sickness, especially from gamma globulin of non-human origin.
  • the antibodies will be formulated in a carrier suitable for injection, i.e., sterile and syringeable.
  • compositions of the disclosure are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water-free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent.
  • a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent.
  • the composition is to be administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline.
  • an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration.
  • compositions may comprise, for example, at least about 0.1% of an active ingredient.
  • an active ingredient may comprise between about 2% to about 75% of the weight of the unit, or between about 25% to about 60%, for example, and any range derivable therein.
  • unit dose refers to physically discrete units suitable for use in a subject, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of the therapeutic composition calculated to produce the desired responses discussed above in association with its administration, i.e., the appropriate route and treatment regimen.
  • the quantity to be administered depends on the effect desired.
  • the actual dosage amount of a composition of the present embodiments administered to a patient or subject can be determined by physical and physiological factors, such as body weight, the age, health, and sex of the subject, the type of disease being treated, the extent of disease penetration, previous or concurrent therapeutic interventions, idiopathy of the patient, the route of administration, and the potency, stability, and toxicity of the particular therapeutic substance.
  • a dose may also comprise from about 1 pg/kg/body weight to about 1000 mg/kg/body weight (this such range includes intervening doses) or more per administration, and any range derivable therein.
  • a derivable range from the numbers listed herein, a range of about 5 pg/kg/body weight to about 100 mg/kg/body weight, about 5 pg/kg/body weight to about 500 mg/kg/body weight, etc. , can be administered.
  • the practitioner responsible for administration will, in any event, determine the concentration of active ingredient(s) in a composition and appropriate dose(s) for the individual subject.
  • compositions and methods of the present embodiments can be used to prevent or treat a disease or disorder associated with a coronavirus infection, such as a SARS-CoV-2 infection or COVID- 19.
  • a disease or disorder associated with a coronavirus infection such as a SARS-CoV-2 infection or COVID- 19.
  • the compositions and methods of the present embodiments involve administering an antibody or an antibody fragment against SARS-CoV-2 spike protein, optionally in combination with a second or additional therapy.
  • Treatment refers to administration or application of a therapeutic agent to a subject or performance of a procedure or modality on a subject for the purpose of obtaining a therapeutic benefit of a disease or health-related condition.
  • a treatment may include administration of a pharmaceutically effective amount of at least one antibody that targets SARS-CoV-2 spike protein, either alone or in combination with other therapies.
  • subject refers to any individual or patient to which the subject methods are performed.
  • the subject is human, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, the subject may be an animal.
  • other animals including mammals, such as rodents (including mice, rats, hamsters, and guinea pigs), cats, dogs, rabbits, farm animals (including cows, horses, goats, sheep, pigs, etc.), and primates (including monkeys, chimpanzees, orangutans, and gorillas) are included within the definition of subject.
  • rodents including mice, rats, hamsters, and guinea pigs
  • farm animals including cows, horses, goats, sheep, pigs, etc.
  • primates including monkeys, chimpanzees, orangutans, and gorillas
  • terapéutica benefit refers to anything that promotes or enhances the well-being of the subject with respect to the medical treatment of this condition. This includes, but is not limited to, a reduction in the frequency or severity of the signs or symptoms of a disease.
  • treatment of a SARS-CoV-2 infection may involve, for example, a reduction in viral load.
  • Treatment of SARS-CoV-2 may also refer to increasing the likely hood of survival of a subject with COVID- 19.
  • the antibodies of the present invention may also find use in combination therapies. Effective combination therapy may be achieved with a single composition or pharmacological formulation that includes both agents, or with two distinct compositions or formulations, administered at the same time, wherein one composition includes at least one antibody of this invention, and the other includes the second agent(s). Alternatively, the antibody therapy may precede or follow the other agent treatment by intervals ranging from minutes to months.
  • the present invention contemplates the use of one or more other therapies for the treatment of COVID-19 include the use of a SARS-CoV-2 protease inhibitor, anti-platelet drugs, an anti-coagulation agent, a human type I interferon, a corticosteroid, or remdesivir.
  • the anti-platelet drug is aspirin, an ADP receptor antagonist (e.g., ticlopidine, clopidogrel, cangrelor, prasugrel, ticagrelor, thienopyridine), or a glycoprotein Ilb/IIIa receptor inhibitor (e.g., abciximab, eptifibatide, ticofiban).
  • an ADP receptor antagonist e.g., ticlopidine, clopidogrel, cangrelor, prasugrel, ticagrelor, thienopyridine
  • a glycoprotein Ilb/IIIa receptor inhibitor e.g., abciximab, eptifibatide, ticofiban.
  • the anti-coagulation agent is rivaroxaban, apixaban, dipyridamole, cilostazol, atromentin, edoxaban, fondaprinux, betrixaban, letaxaban, eribaxaban, hirudin, a thrombin inhibitor (e.g., lepirudin, desirudin, dabigatran, bivalirudin, ximelagatran), argatroban, batroxobin, hementin, low molecular weight heparin, unfractionated heparin, vitamin E, or a vitamin K antagonist (e.g., warfarin (Coumadin), acenocoumarol, phenprocoumon, phenindione).
  • a vitamin K antagonist e.g., warfarin (Coumadin), acenocoumarol, phenprocoumon, phenindione.
  • Type I interferons are a large subgroup of interferon proteins that help regulate the activity of the immune system.
  • the mammalian types are designated IFN-a (alpha), IFN-P (beta), IFN-K (kappa), IFN-8 (delta), IFN-s (epsilon), IFN-r (tau), IFN-(0 (omega), and IFN- ⁇ (zeta, also known as limitin).
  • Type I interferons have shown efficacy against the replication of various viruses, included Zika virus, chikungunya virus, flaviviruses, and hepatitis C virus.
  • Interferon compounds include interferon- alpha, interferon-alpha analogues, interferon- alpha derivatives, interferon- alpha conjugates, interferon beta, interferon-beta analogues, interferon-beta derivatives, interferon-beta conjugates and mixtures thereof.
  • the whole protein or its fragments can be fused with other peptides and proteins such as immunoglobulins and other cytokines.
  • Interferon-alpha and interferon-beta conjugates may represent, for example, a composition comprising interferon- beta coupled to a non-naturally occurring polymer comprising a polyalkylene glycol moiety.
  • Preferred interferon compounds include Roferon®, Intron®, Alferon®, Infergen®, Omniferon®, Alfacon-1, interferon-alpha, interferon-alpha analogues, pegylated interferon- alpha, polymerized interferon-alpha, dimerized interferon-alpha, interferon-alpha conjugated to carriers, interferon-alpha as oral inhalant, interferon-alpha as injectable compositions, interferon-alpha as a topical composition, Roferon® analogues, Intron® analogues, Alferon® analogues, and Infergen® analogues, Omniferon® analogues, Alfacon-1 analogues, interferon beta, AvonexTM, BetaseronTM, BetaferonTM, RebifTM, interferon-beta analogues, pegylated interferon-beta, polymerized interferon-beta, dimerized interferon-
  • Interferon inducers include tilorone, poly(I)-poly(C), imiquimod, cridanimod, bropirimine.
  • agents may be used in combination with certain aspects of the present invention to improve the therapeutic efficacy of treatment.
  • additional agents include anti-virals, corticosteroids (e.g., dexamethasone), chloroquine, hydroxychloroquine, remdesivir, favipiravir, lopinavir, and ritonavir.
  • the present disclosure concerns immunodetection methods for detecting the presence of SARS-CoV-2 spike protein.
  • assay formats are contemplated for detecting protein products, including immunohistochemistry, enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), immunoradiometric assay, fluoroimmunoassay, chemiluminescent assay, bioluminescent assay, dot blotting, FACS analyses, and Western blot to mention a few.
  • ELISA enzyme linked immunosorbent assay
  • RIA radioimmunoassay
  • immunoradiometric assay immunoradiometric assay
  • fluoroimmunoassay chemiluminescent assay
  • bioluminescent assay bioluminescent assay
  • dot blotting FACS analyses
  • Western blot to mention a few.
  • the steps of various useful immunodetection methods have been described in the scientific literature.
  • the immunobinding methods include obtaining a sample, and contacting the sample with an antibody specific for the protein to be detected, as the case may be, under conditions effective to allow the formation of immunocomplexes.
  • the detection of immunocomplex formation is well known in the art and may be achieved through the application of numerous approaches. These methods are generally based upon the detection of a label or marker, such as any of those radioactive, fluorescent, biological and enzymatic tags.
  • a secondary binding ligand such as a second antibody and/or a biotin/avidin ligand binding arrangement, as is known in the art.
  • the antibody employed in the detection may itself be linked to a detectable label, wherein one would then simply detect this label, thereby allowing the amount of the primary immune complexes in the composition to be determined.
  • the first antibody that becomes bound within the primary immune complexes may be detected by means of a second binding ligand that has binding affinity for the antibody.
  • the second binding ligand may be linked to a detectable label.
  • the second binding ligand is itself often an antibody, which may thus be termed a “secondary” antibody.
  • the primary immune complexes are contacted with the labeled, secondary binding ligand, or antibody, under effective conditions and for a period of time sufficient to allow the formation of secondary immune complexes.
  • the secondary immune complexes are then generally washed to remove any non-specifically bound labeled secondary antibodies or ligands, and the remaining label in the secondary immune complexes is then detected.
  • sample refers to any sample suitable for the detection methods provided by the present invention.
  • the sample may be any sample that includes material suitable for detection or isolation.
  • Sources of samples include blood, pleural fluid, peritoneal fluid, urine, saliva, malignant ascites, broncho-alveolar lavage fluid, synovial fluid, and bronchial washes.
  • the sample is a blood sample, including, for example, whole blood or any fraction or component thereof.
  • a blood sample suitable for use with the present invention may be extracted from any source known that includes blood cells or components thereof, such as venous, arterial, peripheral, tissue, cord, and the like.
  • a sample may be obtained and processed using well-known and routine clinical methods (e.g., procedures for drawing and processing whole blood).
  • an exemplary sample may be peripheral blood drawn from a subject with cancer.
  • the biological sample comprises a plurality of cells.
  • the biological sample comprises fresh or frozen tissue.
  • the biological sample comprises formalin fixed, paraffin embedded tissue.
  • the biological sample is a tissue biopsy, fine needle aspirate, blood, serum, plasma, cerebral spinal fluid, urine, stool, saliva, circulating tumor cells, exosomes, or aspirates and bodily secretions, such as sweat.
  • the biological sample contains cell-free DNA.
  • kits are envisioned containing therapeutic agents and/or other therapeutic and delivery agents.
  • a kit is provided for preparing and/or administering a therapy of the embodiments.
  • the kit may comprise one or more sealed vials containing any of the pharmaceutical compositions of the present embodiments.
  • the kit may include, for example, at least one SARS-CoV-2 spike protein antibody or SARS-CoV-2 spike protein- specific CAR construct, as well as reagents to prepare, formulate, and/or administer the components of the embodiments or perform one or more steps of the inventive methods.
  • the kit may also comprise a suitable container, which is a container that will not react with components of the kit, such as an eppendorf tube, an assay plate, a syringe, a bottle, or a tube.
  • a suitable container which is a container that will not react with components of the kit, such as an eppendorf tube, an assay plate, a syringe, a bottle, or a tube.
  • the container may be made from sterilizable materials such as plastic or glass.
  • the present disclosure concerns immunodetection kits for use with the immunodetection methods described above.
  • the antibodies may be used to detect SARS-CoV-2 or SARS-CoV-2 antigens, the antibodies may be included in the kit.
  • the immunodetection kits will thus comprise, in suitable container means, a first antibody that binds to SARS-CoV-2 or SARS-CoV-2 antigen, and optionally an immunodetection reagent.
  • the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein antibody may be pre-bound to a solid support, such as a column matrix and/or well of a microtiter plate.
  • the immunodetection reagents of the kit may take any one of a variety of forms, including those detectable labels that are associated with or linked to the given antibody. Detectable labels that are associated with or attached to a secondary binding ligand are also contemplated. Exemplary secondary ligands are those secondary antibodies that have binding affinity for the first antibody.
  • suitable immunodetection reagents for use in the present kits include the two-component reagent that comprises a secondary antibody that has binding affinity for the first antibody, along with a third antibody that has binding affinity for the second antibody, the third antibody being linked to a detectable label.
  • a number of exemplary labels are known in the art and all such labels may be employed in connection with the present disclosure.
  • kits may further comprise a suitably aliquoted composition of the SARS-CoV-2 or SARS-CoV-2 antigens, whether labeled or unlabeled, as may be used to prepare a standard curve for a detection assay.
  • the kits may contain antibody-label conjugates either in fully conjugated form, in the form of intermediates, or as separate moieties to be conjugated by the user of the kit.
  • the components of the kits may be packaged either in aqueous media or in lyophilized form.
  • the kit may further include an instruction sheet that outlines the procedural steps of the methods set forth herein, and will follow substantially the same procedures as described herein or are known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the instruction information may be in a computer readable media containing machine-readable instructions that, when executed using a computer, cause the display of a real or virtual procedure of delivering a pharmaceutically effective amount of a therapeutic agent.
  • SARS-CoV-2 proteins Expression and purification of SARS-CoV-2 proteins.
  • S-ECD prefusion-stabilized spike ectodomain
  • ELISA The methods for enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay to measure titers of anti-SARS-CoV-2 IgG plasma antibodies have been previously described (Salazar et al., 2020).
  • mAb domain-level reactivity against recombinant spike ECD, RBD and NTD proteins For determination of mAb domain-level reactivity against recombinant spike ECD, RBD and NTD proteins, a standard indirect ELISA was used. Costar high binding 96-well assay plates (Corning) were coated with antigens (4 pg ml 1 ) in PBS. Antigens included in-house produced SARS-COV-2 spike ECD (Wrapp et al., 2020) (S- ECD), SARS-COV-2 spike RBD, as well as commercially obtained SARS-COV-2 spike NTD (Sino Biological).
  • Antigen-reactive mAbs were detected with goat anti-human IgG (Fab)-horseradish peroxidase (Sigma- Aldrich) conjugate in 1:5000 PBS. After washing with PBST-0.1%, the bound antibody was detected with 3,3',5,5'-tetramethylbenzidine soluble substrate (TMB; Millipore) using a Synergy Hl Microplate Reader (BioTek Instruments, Inc.).
  • Fab goat anti-human IgG
  • PBST-0.1% the bound antibody was detected with 3,3',5,5'-tetramethylbenzidine soluble substrate (TMB; Millipore) using a Synergy Hl Microplate Reader (BioTek Instruments, Inc.).
  • VH repertoire sequencing PBMCs were lysed in TRIzol Reagent (Invitrogen) and total RNA was extracted using RNeasy (Qiagen). First strand cDNA was synthesized from 500 ng mRNA using SuperScript IV (Invitrogen), and cDNA encoding the VH regions of the IgG, IgA, and IgM repertoires was amplified with a multiplex primer set (Ippolito et al., 2012) using the FastStart High Fidelity PCR System (Roche) under the following conditions: 2 min at 95 °C; 4 cycles of 92 °C for 30 s, 50 °C for 30 s, 72 °C for 1 min; 4 cycles of 92 °C for 30 s, 55 °C for 30 s, 72 °C for 1 min; 22 cycles of 92 °C for 30 s, 63 °C for 30 s, 72 °C for 1 min; 72 °C for 7 min; hold at
  • PBMCs Paired VH:VL repertoire sequencing.
  • PBMCs were co-emulsified with oligo d(T)25 magnetic beads (New England Biolabs) in lysis buffer (lOOmM Tris pH 7.5, 500mM LiCl, lOmM EDTA,1% lithium dodecyl sulfate, and 5mM dithiothreitol) using a custom flow-focusing device as previously described (McDaniel et al., 2016).
  • the magnetic beads were washed, resuspended in a one-step RT-PCR solution with an overlap extension VH and VL primer set as previously described (McDaniel et al., 2016), and emulsified using a dispersion tube (IKA), and subjected to overlap-extension RT-PCR under the following conditions: 30 min at 55 °C followed by 2 min at 94 °C; 4 cycles of 94 °C for 30 s, 50 °C for 30 s, 72 °C for 2 min; 4 cycles of 94 °C for 30 s, 55 °C for 30 s, 72 °C for 2 min; 32 cycles of 94 °C for 30 s, 60 °C for 30 s, 72 °C for 2 min; 72 °C for 7 min; hold at 4 °C. Amplicons were extracted from the emulsions, further amplified using a nested PCR, and sequenced using 2x300 paired-end Illumina MiSe
  • Ig-seq sample preparation and mass spectrometry Total IgG was isolated from 1 mL plasma using Protein G Plus Agarose (Pierce Thermo Fisher Scientific) affinity chromatography and cleaved into F(ab’)2 fragments using IdeS.
  • SARS-COV-2 Spike -specific F(ab’)2 was isolated by affinity chromatography using recombinant antigen (1 mg SARS-CoV-2 S-2P or RBD) coupled to 0.05 mg dry NHS-activated agarose resin (Thermo Fisher Scientific) as follows.
  • F(ab’)2 (10 mg/mL in PBS) was rotated with antigen-conjugated affinity resin for 1 hour, loaded into 0.5 mL spin columns, washed 12X with 0.4 mL Dulbecco’s PBS, and eluted with 0.5 mL fractions of 1% formic acid. IgG-containing elution fractions were concentrated to dryness in a speed-vac, resuspended in ddfbO, combined, neutralized with 1 M Tris / 3 M NaOH, and prepared for liquid chromatography-tandem mass spectrometry (LC-MS/MS) as described previously.
  • LC-MS/MS liquid chromatography-tandem mass spectrometry
  • VH and VL antibody sequences of interest were ordered as gBlocks (Integrated DNA Technologies) and cloned into a customized pcDNA 3.4 vector containing a human IgGl Fc region.
  • VH and VL plasmids were mixed at 1:2 ratio and were transfected into Expi293F cells (Thermo Fisher Scientific), which were cultured at 37 °C and 8% CO2 for 5 days, then neutralized and centrifuged at 1000 x g for 10 min.
  • Antibodies was isolated from filtered supernatants using Protein G Plus Agarose (Pierce Thermo Fisher Scientific) affinity chromatography, washed with 20 column volumes of PBS, eluted with 100 mM glycine-HCl pH 2.5, and neutralized with 1 M Tris-HCl pH 8.0. The antibodies were buffer-exchanged into PBS and concentrated using 10,000 MWCO Vivaspin centrifugal spin columns (Sartorius). [00235] Binding affinity and checkerboard competition by biolayer interferometry. Bio-Layer interferometry (BLI) assays were performed using an 8-channel Octet RED96e instrument (ForteBio) at 25 °C with shaking at 1,000 r.p.m.
  • Fab fragments 500 pg monoclonal antibody was incubated with 500 units Kgp (GingisKHAN; Genovis) under reducing conditions at 37 °C for 1.5 hours.
  • Fab fragments were isolated using CaptureSelect IgG-CHl Affinity Matrix (Thermo Scientific), washed with 10 column volumes of PBS, eluted with 100 mM glycine-HCl pH 2.5, and neutralized with 1 M Tris- HC1 pH 8.0.
  • Fab fragments were buffer-exchanged into PBS using 3K MWCO Amicon Ultra 0.5 mL Centrifugal Filters (MilliporeSigma).
  • BLI assays were performed as previously described.
  • the checkerboard experiment was performed with Anti-hlgG Fc Capture (AHC) Biosensors (ForteBio Inc., 18-5060) at 25 °C with shaking at 1,000 rpm.
  • the first antibody was captured at 40 pg/ml for lOmin and blocked with 50 pg/ml IgG isotype control for 5min.
  • the antigen (NTD, lOOpg/ml) was associated for 5min and the 40 pg/ml of second antibody were associated for 5 min.
  • the ForteBio Octet Data analysis software was used for all analyses.
  • SARS-CoV-2 Microneutralization Assay USAMRIID: ATCC Vero- E6 cells were seeded on 96- well plates 24-hours prior to infection. MAbs were normalized, 3- fold serially diluted, and incubated with a pre-titrated amount of SARS-CoV-2 virus (SARS- CoV-2/MT020880.1 isolate) at 37 °C for 1 hr. The virus-antibody inoculum was added to the Vero E6 monolayers and incubated for 24 hrs. Cells were then formalin fixed, permeabilized, and stained with a SARS-CoV nucleocapsid-specific antibody. After counterstaining, the monolayer was imaged under immunofluorescence software analyzed to quantify the presence of the detected antigen.
  • SARS-CoV-2 Microneutralization Assay USAMRIID: ATCC Vero- E6 cells were seeded on 96- well plates 24-hours prior to infection. MAbs were normalized, 3- fold serially diluted, and incuba
  • mice Body weight of individual mice was measured daily, and all the mice were euthanized at day 4 post-infection by isoflurane overdose.
  • the right caudal lung lobe was harvested and preserved in PBS at -80°C.
  • Viral titers in the lung tissue were measured by plaque assay on Vero E6 cells.
  • the lineage composition and relative abundance of IgG antibodies comprising the plasma response to either intact stabilized S-ECD (S-2P; Wrapp et al., 2020) or RBD was determined using the Ig-seq pipeline (Lavinder et al., 2015; Lavinder et al., 2014; Ippolito et al., 2012; McDaniel et al., 2016; U.S. Pat. 9,146,241) that integrates LC-MS/MS proteomics of affinity chromatography-enriched IgG antibodies with peripheral B-cell heavy-chain (VH), light-chain (VL), and single B-cell VH:VL variable region repertoires (BCR-seq; U.S. Pat. 9,708,654) (FIG. 1A).
  • VH peripheral B-cell heavy-chain
  • VL light-chain
  • BCR-seq single B-cell VH:VL variable region repertoires
  • Example 2 Plasma IgG repertoire composition and function
  • the anti-NTD antibody CM30 was capable of potently neutralizing authentic SARS-CoV-2 (IC50 0.83 pg ml 1 ) with the anti-RBD CM32 being slightly less potent (2.1 pg ml 1 ) while CM29 and CM31 showed very low or no neutralization activity (FIG. IE).
  • CM29 cross-reacts with the beta-coronaviruses OC43 and HKU1.
  • CM30 derived from the top-ranking NTD-targeting IgG lineage (21% abundance), was the sole plasma mAb (among those lineages detected at >5% of the S- ECD response) that conferred complete protection both in low MAIO viral load (FIG.
  • Example 3 Prevalent IgG antibodies target non-RBD epitope
  • CM17, CM25 and CM58 bound S-ECD with nM affinities (FIG. 2B,
  • IGHV1-24 is expressed in the B-cell repertoire of healthy individuals at a relatively low frequency (0.4%-0.8%) (Boyd et al., 2010), this gene segment has been observed to expressed be ⁇ 10-fold higher than expected ( ⁇ 5%-8%) in memory B cell and plasmablast repertoires from COVID-19 patients (Liu et al., 2020; Brouwer et al., 2020; Nielsen et al., 2020). This prompted the inventors to examine whether IGHV1-24 frequency might similarly be elevated at the serological level in COVID-19 convalescent plasma.
  • IGHV1- 24 plasma antibodies detected in COVID- 19 convalescent plasmas bind to S-ECD, in contrast, serological responses directed against the related class I viral membrane fusion (spike) proteins of influenza and respiratory syncytial virus are not enriched for IGHVL24 (FIG. 3B).
  • FIG. 3C Multiple alignment (FIG. 3C) of the plasma mAbs CM17, CM25 and CM58 with four recently reported neutralizing IGHV1-24 anti-NTD mAbs cloned from peripheral B cells (4A8 (Chi et al., 2020), 1-68 (Liu et al., 2020), 1-87 (Liu et al., 2020), COVA2-37 (Brouwer et al., 2020)) and an additional antibody (COV2-2199; Zost et al., 2020) for which no neutralization data had been reported, identified a pattern of highly similar VH immune receptor sequences (FIG. 3D).
  • the VH region of all 8 mAbs exhibits zero or low somatic mutation (nucleotide identities 97-100%).
  • three glutamate (E) residues (E36, E59, E80; IMGT numbering (Lefranc & Lefranc, 2020) located in CDR-H1, CDR-H2 and framework H3 (FWR-H3), respectively, as well as a phenylalanine (F) residue (F56) in CDR-H2, are invariably unmutated; these exact residues at these precise positions are unique to IGHV1-24, which occurs as a single nonpolymorphic allele among the 129 IGHV genes and alleles residing in the human genome.
  • Residues E36, E59, and E80 occur in fewer than 1%, 2%, and 1% of 87,838 human antibody heavy chains, while F56 occurs in fewer than 1.2% (Swindells et al., 2017).
  • CDR-H3 peptide intervals are restricted to lengths of only 14 or 21 amino acids and contain a key dipeptide motif near the amino terminus: an AV hydrophobic patch (Table 5). Despite these constraints on the heavy chain, six different light chains are observed (Table 5) suggesting a minor role for the VL domain for NTD binding activity or specificity.
  • a “checkerboard” binding-competition experiment (FIG.
  • 3D indicated the presence of at least two epitope clusters on the NTD, including one targeted by all of the tested IGHV1-24 mAbs (4A8, CM25, CM17, CM58, and 1-68), and the IGHV3-11 mAb CM30.
  • IGHV1-24 mAbs 4A8, CM25, CM17, CM58, and 1-68
  • IGHV3-11 mAb CM30 Within this epitope cluster, particularly strong levels of competition were seen among CM17, CM25, CM58, and 4A8 (FIG. 3D, dashed box).
  • Another NTD epitope is identified by CM31 (IGHV2-5, 6.4% mutation), which demonstrates overlap with CM30 (IGHV3-11; 3.1% mutation), CM58, and 1-68 but does not compete with the other three IGHV1-24 NTD mAbs.
  • CM31 instead shows low-level competition with the RBD-specific mAb CM32.
  • CM25 bound to S-ECD was determined at an overall resolution of 3.3 A (FIG. 4A).
  • Three CM25 Fabs were bound to each trimeric S- ECD protein via interactions with the NTD, but the flexibility of the NTD relative to the rest of the spike resulted in poor density for the CM25 interface.
  • Focused refinement of the NTD- CM25 region was performed to improve map quality, enabling building and analysis of the binding interface.
  • the structure revealed a heavy-chain-dominant mode of binding, with substantial contacts mediated by interactions between the three CDRs and the N3 and N5 loops of the NTD (FIG. 4B).
  • a minor light chain contact is formed through a CH/pi interaction between CDR-L2 Tyr55 and Pro251 within the N5 loop.
  • CDR-H1 interacts extensively through hydrogen bonds and hydrophobic interactions, including a salt bridge formed between the conserved Glu36 residue and the N5 loop residue Arg246 (FIG. 4C).
  • the common IGHV1-24 Phe56 residue in CDR-H2 forms a pi- cation interaction with Lysl47 in the N3 loop (FIG. 4C).
  • CM25 contains a 14-amino-acid CDR-H3 loop, including the AV aliphatic motif found in all but one of the convergent IGHV1-24 NTD-binding mAbs. Alal09 and Vail 10 are buried at the interface in a binding pocket framed by the N3 and N5 loops.
  • the one extant structure of an IGHV1-24 NTD- binding antibody isolated by B-cell cloning was recently determined for mAb 4A83. A comparison of the two structures reveals that the AV dipeptide interaction is structurally conserved, and the 21 amino-acid CDR-H3 of 4A8 extends along the outside of the NTD without adding additional binding contacts (FIG. 4D).
  • Both structures show extensive contacts between the heavy chain of the Fabs and the N3 and N5 loops of the NTD.
  • the Glu36 - Arg246 salt bridge and an identical CDR-H2 contact between Phe56 and Lysl47 are also observed at the 4A8-NTD interface.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)

Abstract

Provided herein are antibodies and antibody fragments that bind to SARS-CoV-2 spike protein. Methods of treating or preventing SARS-CoV-2 infections are provided, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a SARS-CoV-2 spike protein-targeting antibody.

Description

DESCRIPTION
HUMAN MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES TARGETING THE SARS-COV-2 SPIKE PROTEIN
REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] The present application claims the priority benefit of United States provisional application number 63/125,832, filed December 15, 2020, the entire contents of which is incorporated herein by reference.
STATEMENT REGARDING FEDERALLY SPONSORED RESEARCH
[0002] This invention was made with government support under Grant no. W911NF- 12-1-0390 awarded by the Army Research Office. The government has certain rights in the invention.
REFERENCE TO A SEQUENCE LISTING
[0003] The instant application contains a Sequence Listing, which has been submitted in ASCII format via EFS-Web and is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Said ASCII copy, created on December 1, 2021, is named UTFBP1267WO_ST25.txt and is 31,083 byes in size.
BACKGROUND
1. Field
[0004] The present invention relates generally to the fields of medicine, immunology, and virology. More particularly, it concerns human antibodies that bind the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein and methods of their use.
2. Description of Related Art
[0005] SARS-CoV-2, the causative agent of the COVID- 19 pandemic, has spread to every continent except for Antarctica. The spike (S) surface glycoprotein is the primary antigenic target for the majority of vaccines and monoclonal antibodies (mAbs) currently under development or in clinical trials worldwide (Corbett et al., 2020; Yang et al., 2020; Folegatti et al., 2020; Mulligan et al., 2020). The S ectodomain (S-ECD) folds into a multidomain architecture (Wrapp et al., 2020; Walls et al., 2020) and includes the ACE2 receptor binding domain (RBD), which is essential for viral infectivity, and the structurally adjacent N-terminal domain (NTD), the function of which is currently unclear.
[0006] MAbs targeting the spike have been isolated predominately by single B-cell cloning followed by screening for binding and neutralization in vitro (Robbiani et al., 2020; Ju et al., 2020; Brouwer et al., 2020; Zost et al., 2020; Cao et al., 2020; Rogers et al., 2020; Shi et al., 2020; Wee et al., 2020; Hansen et al., 2020). These studies have revealed B-cell recognition of multiple spike epitopes and have led to the discovery of potent antibodies targeting the RBD. By contrast, the epitopes targeted by the circulating antibodies in convalescent individuals, especially those IgG plasma antibodies that are most abundant and that play a dominant role in the protective humoral immune response, have not been reported. Whereas serological assays of COVID-19 plasma have demonstrated that the IgG plasma antibody repertoire, like the B-cell repertoire, can recognize multiple spike epitopes (Ripperger et al., 2020; Piccoli et al., 2020; Weisblum et al., 2020; Juno et al., 2020), the clonal diversity and temporal dynamics of the two repertoires are divergent (Lavinder et al., 2015; Lavinder et al., 2014; Purtha et al., 2011; Smith et al., 1997). Evidence for divergent repertoires in COVID-19 includes the paradoxical observation that individuals may harbor B cells that encode potent virus-neutralizing mAbs even though virus-neutralizing plasma antibodies circulating in the blood are nearly undetectable (Weisblum et al., 2020; Luchsinger et al., 2020; Wu et al., 2020). Needed is an understanding of the molecular composition, epitope specificity and contribution to protection of the individual constituent antibodies that comprise the serological repertoire in CO VID- 19 convalescent study subjects.
SUMMARY
[0007] In one embodiment, provided herein are monoclonal antibodies or antibody fragments, wherein the antibodies or antibody fragments comprise clone-paired heavy and light chain CDR sequences derived from the clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences of Table 2. In some aspects, the antibodies or antibody fragments comprise clone-paired heavy and light chain CDR sequences from Table 1. In some aspects, the antibodies or antibody fragments comprise clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences having, independently, at least 70%, 80%, or 90% identity to sequences from Table 2. In some aspects, the antibodies or antibody fragments comprise clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences each having at least 95% identity to sequences from Table 2. In some aspects, the antibodies or antibody fragments comprises clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences from Table 2.
[0008] In some aspects, the antibody fragments are recombinant scFv (single chain fragment variable) antibodies, Fab fragments, F(ab')2 fragments, or Fv fragments. In some aspects, the antibodies are chimeric antibodies or bispecific antibodies. In some aspects, the antibodies are capable of binding to SARS-CoV-2 spike protein. In some aspects, the antibodies are IgG antibodies or recombinant IgG antibodies or antibody fragments. In some aspects, the antibodies or antibody fragments are fused to an imaging agent. In some aspects, the antibodies or antibody fragments are labeled with, for example, a fluorescent label, an enzymatic label, or a radioactive label.
[0009] In one embodiment, provided herein are monoclonal antibodies or antibody fragments, which compete for binding to the same epitope as a monoclonal antibody or an antibody fragment having clone-paired heavy and light chain CDR sequences from Table 1 or clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences from Table 2.
[0010] In one embodiment, provided herein are monoclonal antibodies or antibody fragments that bind to an epitope on SARS-CoV-2 spike protein recognized by a monoclonal antibody or an antibody fragment having clone-paired heavy and light chain CDR sequences from Table 1 or clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences from Table 2.
[0011] In one embodiment, provided herein are isolated nucleic acids encoding the antibody heavy and/or light chain variable region of the antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments. In some aspects, the nucleic acid is part of an expression vector. In some aspects, the nuclei acid is in a hybridoma or engineered cell.
[0012] In one embodiment, provided herein are methods of making the monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments, the method comprising culturing the hybridoma or engineered cell of the present embodiments under conditions that allow expression of the antibody or antibody fragment and optionally isolating the antibody or antibody fragment from the culture.
[0013] In one embodiment, provided herein are pharmaceutical formulations comprising one or more antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments. [0014] In one embodiment, provided herein are pharmaceutical formulations comprising one or more expression vector encoding a first antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments. In some aspects, the pharmaceutical formulation comprises one or more expression vector encoding a second antibody or antibody fragment, such as a distinct antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments.
[0015] In one embodiment, provided herein are methods of reducing the likelihood of a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, infection in a patient at risk of contracting a betacoronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, the methods comprising delivering to the patient an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments. In some aspects, the methods are further characterized as methods of preventing a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, infection in the patient. In some aspects, the patient has been exposed to a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2. In some aspects, the antibody or antibody fragment is delivered to the patient prior to infection or after infection. In some aspects, delivering comprises antibody or antibody fragment administration, or genetic delivery with an RNA or DNA sequence or vector encoding the antibody or antibody fragment.
[0016] In one embodiment, provided herein are methods of treating a patient infected with a beta-coronavirus infection, e.g., a SARS-CoV-2 infection, the methods comprising delivering to the patient an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments. In some aspects, the methods comprise delivering to the patient a cocktail of antibodies or antibody fragments selected from among the antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments. In some aspects, the cocktail comprises the CM29 antibody, the CM30 antibody, and the CM32 antibody. In some aspects, the cocktail is about 50% CM29, about 20% CM30, and about 20% CM32. In some aspects, delivering comprises antibody or antibody fragment administration, or genetic delivery with an RNA or DNA sequence or vector encoding the antibody or antibody fragment. In some aspects, the methods reduce the viral load in the patient.
[0017] In one embodiment, provided herein are methods of detecting a betacoronavirus infection, e.g., a SARS-CoV-2 infection, in a patient, the methods comprising: (a) contacting a sample obtained from the patient with an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments; and (b) detecting the beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS- CoV-2, in the sample by detecting binding of the antibody or antibody fragment to a betacoronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, antigen in the sample. In some aspects, the sample is a body fluid. In some aspects, the sample is blood, sputum, tears, saliva, mucous or serum, semen, cervical or vaginal secretions, amniotic fluid, placental tissues, urine, exudate, transudate, tissue scrapings or feces. In some aspects, detecting comprises an ELISA, RIA, lateral flow assay or Western blot. In some aspects, the methods further comprise performing steps (a) and (b) a second time and determining a change in beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, antigen levels as compared to the first assay.
[0018] In one embodiment, provided herein are methods of determining a severity of a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, infection in a patient, the methods comprising performing an assay to determine an anti-SARS-CoV-2 spike protein N-terminal domain (NTD) antibody titer in a blood, plasma, or serum sample from the patient and correlating the severity of the infection based on the NTD antibody titer. In some aspects, a higher NTD antibody titer indicates a heightened immune response, and thus a less severe infection. In some aspects, the assay comprises contacting the blood, plasma, or serum sample with a SARS-CoV-2 NTD. In some aspects, the methods further comprise detecting a level of binding of the NTD titer to the SARS-CoV-2 NTD. In some aspects, the titer is determined by performing an ELISA assay. In some aspects, the titer is determined using a microneutralization assay to detect the presence of neutralizing antibodies. In some aspects, the antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments is used as a positive control in the assay.
[0019] In one embodiment, provided herein are methods of predicting a neutralization activity of blood, plasma, or serum sample from a patient infected with SARS-CoV-2, the methods comprising performing an assay to determine an anti-SARS-CoV-2 spike protein N- terminal domain (NTD) antibody titer in the blood, plasma, or serum sample and predicting the neutralization activity of the sample based on the NTD antibody titer. In some aspects, a higher NTD antibody titer indicates a higher neutralization activity. In some aspects, the assay comprises contacting the blood, plasma, or serum sample with a SARS-CoV-2 NTD. In some aspects, the methods further comprise detecting a level of binding of the NTD titer to the SARS-CoV-2 NTD. In some aspects, the titer is determined by performing an ELISA assay. In some aspects, the antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments is used as a positive control in the assay.
[0020] In one embodiment, provided herein are methods of predicting whether an anti-SARS-CoV-2 antibody binds to the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein N-terminal domain (NTD), the methods comprising determining whether the antibody comprises (i) at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or 100% identity to IGHV1-24, (ii) an E31 in CDR-H1, (iii) an E59 in CDR-H2, (iv) an E72 in FWR-H3, (v) an AV motif in CDR-H3, and/or (vi) an AVxnG motif in CDR-H3, where n is 1-3. In some aspects, the AVxnG motif in CDR-H3 is an AVAG motif.
[0021] In one embodiment, provided herein are methods of preparing a pharmaceutical formulation comprising a cocktail of antibodies or antibody fragments that bind to a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, spike protein, the methods comprising (i) identifying and quantifying the anti-beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, spike protein antibodies present in a blood, plasma, or serum sample from a patient infected with betacoronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2; (ii) determining the ratio at which each of the identified antibodies was present in the sample; and (iii) preparing a pharmaceutical formulation comprising the identified antibodies at the determined ratio. In some aspects, step (i) comprises performing affinity chromatography to enrich IgG antibodies in the sample that bind to a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, spike protein. In some aspects, the betacoronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, spike protein extracellular domain is used as the ligand. In some aspects, the beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, spike protein receptor binding domain is used as the ligand. In some aspects, step (i) comprises LC-MS/MS antibody profiling (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. 9,146,241). In one embodiment, provided herein are pharmaceutical formulations prepared by the method of any one of the foregoing embodiments.
[0022] In one embodiment, provided herein are methods of determining an antigenic integrity, correct conformation and/or correct sequence of a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS- CoV-2, antigen, the method comprising: (a) contacting a sample comprising the antigen with a first antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments; and (b) determining antigenic integrity, correct conformation and/or correct sequence of the antigen by detecting binding of the first antibody or antibody fragment to the antigen. In some aspects, the sample comprises a recombinantly produced antigen. In some aspects, the sample comprises a vaccine formulation comprising the antigen. In some aspects, detecting comprises an ELISA, RIA, lateral flow assay or Western blot. In some aspects, the methods further comprise performing steps (a) and (b) a second time to determine the antigenic stability of the antigen over time. [0023] In one embodiment, provided herein are methods of detecting betacoronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, spike protein in an in vitro sample, the methods comprising contacting the in vitro sample with an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments and detecting the binding of the antibody or antibody fragment to the sample. In some aspects, the detecting is by flow cytometry, mass spectrometry, western blot, immunohistochemistry, ELISA, or RIA.
[0024] In one embodiment, provided herein are antibodies or antibody fragments of any one of the present embodiments or pharmaceutical formulations comprising said antibodies or antibody fragments, for use in treating or preventing a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, infection in a patient.
[0025] In one embodiment, provided herein is the use of an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of the present embodiments or pharmaceutical formulations comprising said antibodies or antibody fragments, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating or preventing a beta-coronavirus, e.g., SARS-CoV-2, infection in a patient.
[0026] Other objects, features and advantages of the present invention will become apparent from the following detailed description. It should be understood, however, that the detailed description and the specific examples, while indicating preferred embodiments of the invention, are given by way of illustration only, since various changes and modifications within the spirit and scope of the invention will become apparent to those skilled in the art from this detailed description.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0027] The following drawings form part of the present specification and are included to further demonstrate certain aspects of the present invention. The invention may be better understood by reference to one or more of these drawings in combination with the detailed description of specific embodiments presented herein.
[0028] FIGS. 1A-G. A single spike NTD-targeting IgG antibody in plasma can confer protection without a need for RBD-directed activity. (FIG. 1A) Polyclonal IgG plasma antibodies were affinity purified using stabilized spike S-2P S-ECD (Wrapp et al., 2020) or RBD, and binding specificity was mapped using purified S subdomains; anti-RBD (green); anti-S2 (blue); anti-NTD (red). (FIG. IB) The majority of the plasma anti-S-ECD response is directed to non-RBD epitopes: Binding (1:150 plasma dilution) to S-ECD alone, or in the presence of 50 pg/mL RBD or S-ARBD deletion mutant. (FIG. 1C) Quantitative determination of plasma RBD and non-RBD antibody abundance in early convalescence. Abundance normalized to the entire S-ECD plasma IgG repertoire. (FIG. ID) Composition, binding specificity and relative abundance of antibodies in early convalescent plasma (study subject P3). (FIG. IE) Authentic virus neutralization of the four topmost abundant plasma IgGs (CM29, CM30, CM31, CM32) from plasma lineages Lin.l, Lin.2, Lin.3, Lin.4 in FIG. ID that account for >90% of the plasma anti-S-ECD repertoire. The three lines that cross the 50% neutralization line represent, from left to right, CM30, CM32, and CM29. (FIGS. 1F&G) Prophylactic protection of 12 m.o. BALB/C mice against lethal challenge with 104 PFU mouse-adapted (MAIO) SARS-CoV-2 using 200pg/mouse of non-RBD mAbs CM29, CM30, and CM31. Antibody cocktail (200 pg/mouse) consisted of 2:1:1 ratio of CM29, CM30, CM31, reflecting their relative plasma abundance (FIG. ID). **p<0.005; **** <0.0001.
[0029] FIGS. 2A-F. Protective spike NTD-targeting antibodies are prevalent in the plasma of convalescent COVID-19 study subjects. (FIG. 2A) Temporal dynamics of the plasma anti-S-ECD IgG repertoire at days 12 and 56 post-symptom onset. (FIG. 2B) Biolayer interferometry binding sensorgrams to S-ECD ligand of anti-NTD mAbs CM17 and CM25 (subject P2) and CM58 (subject P4). (FIG. 2C) In vitro live virus neutralization. (FIGS. 2D-F) Prophylactic protection of 12 m.o. BALB/C mice against intranasal challenge with 104 PFU of mouse-adapted (MAIO) SARS-CoV-2. In vivo prophylactic protection to MAIO challenge; experimental conditions as in FIGS. 1F&G except challenge dose was 105 PFU. ***p<0.0007; ****p<0.0001.
[0030] FIGS. 3A-D. Genetic basis of a shared, or public, class of IGHV1-24 plasma antibodies targeting the spike NTD. (FIG. 3A) IGHV usage of plasma anti-S-ECD or anti-RBD antibodies in all subjects (n=4) at days 11-19 post-onset of symptoms. (FIG. 3B) IGHV 1-24 antibodies as a percentage of the circulating IgG plasma antibody repertoire: reactivity to SARS-CoV-2 spike S-ECD or RBD in n=4 CO VID-19 subjects, or reactivity in healthy subjects to vaccine spike antigens for either respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) or trivalent influenza vaccine hemagglutinin HA1 (TIV). ** <0.01. (FIG. 3C) Multiple sequence alignment of IGHV 1-24 neutralizing anti-NTD IgGs from plasma (CM25 (SEQ ID NO: 45), CM17 (SEQ ID NO: 43) and CM58 (SEQ ID NO: 55)) or from peripheral B cells (4A8 (SEQ ID NO: 57; Chi et al., 2020), 1-68 (SEQ ID NO: 58) and 1-87 (SEQ ID NO: 59) from a subject with ARDS (Liu et al., 2020), COV2-2199 (SEQ ID NO: 60; Zost et al., 2020), and COVA2-37 (mild disease subject) (SEQ ID NO: 61; Brouwer et al., 2020). Heatmap shows recombinant mAb affinity (KD) and live virus neutralization (IC50) of the IGHV1-24 anti-NTD public class of antibodies. The sequence labeled IGHVL24 is SEQ ID NO: 62. (FIG. 3D) Competitive biolayer interferometry binding assay (“checkboard competition”) of NTD-binding mAbs found in this study (CM17, CM25, CM58, CM30, and CM31) and others (4A8 and 1-68). RBD-binding mAbs CM32 and CR3022 included for comparison. Numbers refer to the shift, in nanometers, after second mAb binding to the preformed mAb-NTD complex.
[0031] FIGS. 4A-D. Structural basis of a shared, or public, class of IGHV1-24 plasma antibodies targeting the spike NTD. (FIG. 4A) Cryo-EM structure of CM25 bound to S-ECD at an overall resolution of 3.3 A. (FIG. 4B) The VH domain dominants the mode of binding, with substantial contacts mediated by interactions between the three CDRs and the N3 and N5 loops of the NTD. (FIG. 4C) CDR-H1 interaction includes a salt bridge formed between the conserved Glu36 residue and the N5 loop residue Arg246. The IGHV1-24 Phe56 residue in CDR-H2 forms a pi-cation interaction with Lysl47 in the N3 loop. (FIG. 4D) The AV dipeptide interaction is structurally conserved between CM25 and 4A8. Both structures show extensive contacts with the N3 and N5 loops of the NTD. Ala 109 and Vail 10 are buried at the interface in a binding pocket framed by the N3 and N5 loops. Notably, Glu36 - Arg246 salt bridge and an identical CDR-H2 contact between Phe56 and Lysl47 are also observed at the 4A8-NTD interface.
[0032] FIG. 5. Live virus neutralization titers of four COVID+ study subjects’ plasms at each collection time point. Serial dilutions of plasms were tested in duplicate (SD error bars) for inhibition of live SARS-CoV-2 virus infection of in vitro monolayered Vero E6 cells. The percent of infected Vero E6 cells in each sample dilution was normalized relative to the virus-only (no plasms) negative control sample. At 60% relative infection, the lines represent, from left to right, P3 day 11, Pl day 12, Pl day 56, P2 day 56, P2 day 12, P4 day 45, and P4 day 19.
[0033] FIGS. 6A-C. Ig-seq plasma Igg lineage profiles of study subjects at early and late convalescent time points. (FIG. 6 A) Donor Pl. (FIG. 6B) Donor P2. (FIG. 6C) Donor P4. In each panel, on the left, the first time point Ig-seq profile (days 11-19) for each subject (subject P3 found in FIG. 1) shows both the SARS-CoV-2 spike ECD (S-ECD) and RBD abundance for each plasma IgG lineage detected at >0.5% anti-S-ECD plasma IgG (summed lineage XIC). Similarly, in each panel, on the right, the second time point data for S-ECD (days 45-56) is shown for each lineage detected at >0.5% S-ECD plasma IgG abundance (time point 2), alongside early time point S-ECD data for comparison (subject P2 found in FIG. 2).
[0034] FIG. 7. Ig-seq intra-lineage diversification in study subject P3 at day 11. The top two plasma IgG lineages from subject P3 demonstrate a large number of LC-MS/MS identified unique CDR-H3 clones within each lineage (33 total unique CDR-H3 clones in top two IgG lineages combined). This indicates extensive ongoing diversification within this donor at early convalescence.
[0035] FIG. 8. ADCP ECD-bead assay using recombinant plasma IgG mAbs. ADCP activity of recombinant plasma mAbs serially diluted on THP-1 cells in the presence of spike-conjugated, fluorescent polystyrene beads. The phagocytosis index metric represents the percent of bead-positive THP-1 cells multiplied by the average MFI of each cell to account for increased levels of bead internalization. At 0.5 nM, the lines represent, from top to bottom, CM32, CM17, CM25, CM29, CM58, CM30, and CR3022.
[0036] FIGS. 9A-B. In vivo protection against SARS-CoV-2 viral challenge using recombinant plasma IgG mAbs. (FIG. 9A) Day four lung viral titers and average cohort weight loss of 12 m.o. BALB/C mice after intranasal challenge with 103 PFU of mouse- adapted (MAIO) SARS-CoV-2. 200 ug of mAb was administered 12 hours prior to challenge. (FIG. 9B) Averaged cohort survival across four days post-challenge in the high dose challenge of MAIO (104 PFU/mouse).
[0037] FIG. 10. Independent live virus neutralization titers of recombinant plasma IgG mAbs CM17, CM25, and CM32. In vitro live virus neutralization curves for CM17, CM25, and CM32 repeated in second independent laboratory demonstrate similar levels of inhibition (as compared to data in FIGS. IE and 2C) of live SARS-CoV-2 vims infection of monolayered Vero E6 cells. The percent of infected Vero E6 cells in each sample dilution was normalized relative to the virus-only (no plasma) negative control sample. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0038] Provided herein are human monoclonal antibodies reactive with the spike protein of SARS-CoV-2, the causative agent of COVID-19. These monoclonal antibodies react variously with the receptor binding domain (RBD), the N-terminal domain (NTD), or the S2 subunit (S2). These monoclonal antibodies can be used as diagnostics, prophylactics, or therapeutics for the monitoring, containment, or treatment, respectively, of SARS-CoV-2 infections.
[0039] While humoral immunity is essential for the control of SARS-CoV-2, the molecular composition, binding epitopes and effector functions of the component immunoglobulin G (IgG) antibodies that circulate in blood plasma following infection are not known. Proteomic deconvolution of the circulating IgG repertoire (Ig-Seq; U.S. Pat. 9,146,241; Lavinder et al., 2015) to the spike Ectodomain (S-ECD; Wrapp et al., 2020) in four convalescent study subjects revealed that the plasma response is oligoclonal and directed predominantly (>80%) to non-RBD epitopes in S-ECD. In one subject, just four IgG lineages (1 anti-S2, 2 anti-NTD and 1 anti-RBD), accounted for 93.5% of the repertoire. While the anti-RBD and one of the anti-NTD antibodies were equally potently neutralizing in vitro, it was nonetheless found that only the anti-NTD antibody was capable of conferring protection to lethal viral challenge, singly or also in combination as a cocktail where it dominated the effect of the other plasma antibodies. In vivo protective plasma anti-NTD antibodies were identified in 3/4 subjects analyzed, and a shared, public class of antibodies targeting the NTD that utilize unmutated or near- germline IGHV1-24, the most electronegative IGHV element in the human genome, was discovered. Structural analysis revealed that binding to NTD is dictated by interactions with germline residues uniquely encoded by IGHV1-24 that contribute X/Y A2 of the interfacial area. Together with recent reports of germline IGHV1-24 antibodies isolated by B-cell cloning (Chi et al., 2020; Liu et al., 2020), these data reveal a class of public IgG antibodies that are readily observed in convalescent plasma and underscore the role of NTD-directed antibodies in protection against SARS-CoV-2 infection.
I. Definitions
[0040] As used herein the specification, “a” or “an” may mean one or more. As used herein in the claim(s), when used in conjunction with the word “comprising,” the words “a” or “an” may mean one or more than one. [0041] The use of the term “or” in the claims is used to mean “and/or” unless explicitly indicated to refer to alternatives only or the alternatives are mutually exclusive, although the disclosure supports a definition that refers to only alternatives and “and/or.” As used herein “another” may mean at least a second or more.
[0042] Throughout this application, the term “about” is used to indicate that a value includes the inherent variation of error for the device, the inherent variation in the method being employed to determine the value, the variation that exists among the study subjects, or a value that is within 10% of a stated value.
[0043] As used herein, “essentially free,” in terms of a specified component, is used herein to mean that none of the specified component has been purposefully formulated into a composition and/or is present only as a contaminant or in trace amounts. The total amount of the specified component resulting from any unintended contamination of a composition is therefore well below 0.05%, preferably below 0.01%. Most preferred is a composition in which no amount of the specified component can be detected with standard analytical methods.
[0044] “Nucleic acid,” “nucleic acid sequence,” “oligonucleotide,” “polynucleotide” or other grammatical equivalents as used herein means at least two nucleotides, either deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, or analogs thereof, covalently linked together. Polynucleotides are polymers of any length, including, e.g., 20, 50, 100, 200, 300, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 5000, 7000, 10,000, etc. A polynucleotide described herein generally contains phosphodiester bonds, although in some cases, nucleic acid analogs are included that may have at least one different linkage, e.g. , phosphoramidate, phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, or O-methylphophoroamidite linkages, and peptide nucleic acid backbones and linkages. Mixtures of naturally occurring polynucleotides and analogs can be made; alternatively, mixtures of different polynucleotide analogs, and mixtures of naturally occurring polynucleotides and analogs may be made. The following are non-limiting examples of polynucleotides: a gene or gene fragment, exons, introns, messenger RNA (mRNA), transfer RNA, ribosomal RNA, ribozymes, cDNA, cRNA, recombinant polynucleotides, branched polynucleotides, plasmids, vectors, isolated DNA of any sequence, isolated RNA of any sequence, nucleic acid probes, and primers. A polynucleotide may comprise modified nucleotides, such as methylated nucleotides and nucleotide analogs. If present, modifications to the nucleotide structure may be imparted before or after assembly of the polymer. The sequence of nucleotides may be interrupted by non-nucleotide components. A polynucleotide may be further modified after polymerization, such as by conjugation with a labeling component. The term also includes both double- and single-stranded molecules. Unless otherwise specified or required, the term polynucleotide encompasses both the double-stranded form and each of two complementary single-stranded forms known or predicted to make up the double-stranded form. A polynucleotide is composed of a specific sequence of four nucleotide bases: adenine (A), cytosine (C), guanine (G), thymine (T), and uracil (U) for thymine when the polynucleotide is RNA. Thus, the term “polynucleotide sequence” is the alphabetical representation of a polynucleotide molecule. Unless otherwise indicated, a particular polynucleotide sequence also implicitly encompasses conservatively modified variants thereof (e.g., degenerate codon substitutions) and complementary sequences as well as the sequence explicitly indicated. Specifically, degenerate codon substitutions may be achieved by generating sequences in which the third position of one or more selected (or all) codons is substituted with mixed-base and/or deoxyinosine residues.
[0045] The terms “peptide,” “polypeptide” and “protein” used herein refer to polymers of amino acid residues. These terms also apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residues is an artificial chemical mimetic of a corresponding naturally occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally occurring amino acid polymers, those containing modified residues, and non- naturally occurring amino acid polymers. In the present case, the term “polypeptide” encompasses an antibody or a fragment thereof.
[0046] Other terms used in the fields of recombinant nucleic acid technology, microbiology, immunology, antibody engineering, and molecular and cell biology as used herein will be generally understood by one of ordinary skill in the applicable arts.
II. Antibodies and Modifications of Antibodies
[0047] Provided herein are human monoclonal antibodies having clone-paired CDRs from the heavy and light chains as illustrated in Table 1 as well as clone-paired variable regions as illustrated in Table 2. Such antibodies may be produced using methods described herein.
Table 1. CDRs of heavy and light chain variable sequences of the antibodies as predicted by MiXCR (Bolotin et al. , 2015).
Figure imgf000014_0001
Figure imgf000015_0001
Table 2. Amino acid sequences of the antibody variable regions.
Figure imgf000016_0001
Figure imgf000017_0001
[0048] The monoclonal antibodies of the present invention have several applications, including the production of diagnostic kits for use in detecting and diagnosing SARS-CoV-2 infection, as well as for treating or preventing SARS-CoV-2 infections in patients. The S2- directed antibody CM29 cross-reacts with the beta-coronaviruses OC43 and HKU1. As such, in some cases, the monoclonal antibodies of the present invention can be used to detect, diagnose, treat, or prevent a beta-coronavirus infection. In these contexts, one may link such antibodies to diagnostic or therapeutic agents, use them as capture agents or competitors in competitive assays, or use them individually without additional agents being attached thereto. The antibodies may be mutated or modified, as discussed further below. Methods for preparing and characterizing antibodies are well known in the art (see, e.g., Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, 1988; U.S. Patent 4,196,265).
[0049] An “antibody” is an immunoglobulin molecule capable of specific binding to a target, such as a carbohydrate, polynucleotide, lipid, polypeptide, etc., through at least one antigen recognition site, located in the variable region of the immunoglobulin molecule. As used herein, the term encompasses not only intact polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies, but also fragments thereof (such as Fab, Fab', F(ab')2, Fv, Fd, Fd', single chain antibody (ScFv), diabody, linear antibody), mutants thereof, naturally occurring variants, fusion proteins comprising an antibody portion with an antigen recognition site of the required specificity, chimeric antibodies, and any other modified configuration of the immunoglobulin molecule that comprises an antigen recognition site of the required specificity.
[0050] An “isolated antibody” is one that has been separated and/or recovered from a component of its natural environment. Contaminant components of its natural environment are materials that would interfere with diagnostic or therapeutic uses for the antibody, and may include enzymes, hormones, and other proteinaceous or non-proteinaceous solutes. In particular instances, the antibody is purified: (1) to greater than 95% by weight of antibody as determined by the Lowry method, and most particularly more than 99% by weight; (2) to a degree sufficient to obtain at least 15 residues of N-terminal or internal amino acid sequence by use of a spinning cup sequenator; or (3) to homogeneity by SDS-PAGE under reducing or non-reducing conditions using Coomassie blue or silver stain. An isolated antibody includes the antibody in situ within recombinant cells since at least one component of the antibody’s natural environment will not be present. Ordinarily, however, an isolated antibody will be prepared by at least one purification step.
[0051] The basic four-chain antibody unit is a heterotetrameric glycoprotein composed of two identical light (L) chains and two identical heavy (H) chains. The term “heavy chain” as used herein refers to the larger immunoglobulin subunit which associates, through its amino terminal region, with the immunoglobulin light chain. The heavy chain comprises a variable region (VH) and a constant region (CH). The constant region further comprises the CHI, hinge, CH2, and CH3 domains. In the case of IgE, IgM, and IgY, the heavy chain comprises a CH4 domain but does not have a hinge domain. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that heavy chains are classified as gamma, mu, alpha, delta, or epsilon (y, [i, a, 8, s), with some subclasses among them (e.g. , yl-y4, al-a2). It is the nature of this chain that determines the “class” of the antibody as IgG, IgM, IgA IgD, or IgE, respectively. The immunoglobulin subclasses (isotypes), e.g., IgGl, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgAl, etc. are well characterized and are known to confer functional specialization.
[0052] The term “light chain” as used herein refers to the smaller immunoglobulin subunit which associates with the amino terminal region of a heavy chain. As with a heavy chain, a light chain comprises a variable region (VL) and a constant region (CL). Light chains are classified as either kappa or lambda (K, X) based on the amino acid sequences of their constant domains (CL). A pair of these can associate with a pair of any of the various heavy chains to form an immunoglobulin molecule. Also encompassed in the meaning of light chain are light chains with a lambda variable region (V-lambda) linked to a kappa constant region (C-kappa) or a kappa variable region (V-kappa) linked to a lambda constant region (C- lambda).
[0053] An IgM antibody, for example, consists of 5 basic heterotetramer units along with an additional polypeptide called J chain, and therefore contain 10 antigen binding sites, while secreted IgA antibodies can polymerize to form polyvalent assemblages comprising 2-5 of the basic 4-chain units along with J chain. In the case of IgGs, the 4-chain unit is generally about 150,000 daltons. Each L chain is linked to an H chain by one covalent disulfide bond, while the two H chains are linked to each other by one or more disulfide bonds depending on the H chain isotype. Each H and L chain also has regularly spaced intrachain disulfide bridges. Each H chain has at the N-terminus, a variable region (VH) followed by three constant domains (CH) for each of the alpha and gamma chains and four CH domains for mu and isotypes. Each L chain has at the N-terminus, a variable region (VL) followed by a constant domain (CL) at its other end. The VL is aligned with the VH and the CL is aligned with the first constant domain of the heavy chain (Cnl). Particular amino acid residues are believed to form an interface between the light chain and heavy chain variable regions. The pairing of a VH and VL together forms a single antigen-binding site. For the structure and properties of the different classes of antibodies, see, e.g., Basic and Clinical Immunology, 8th edition, Daniel P. Stites, Abba I. Terr and Tristram G. Parslow (eds.), Appleton & Lange, Norwalk, Conn., 1994, page 71, and Chapter 6.
[0054] A “variable region” of an antibody refers to the variable region of the antibody light chain or the variable region of the antibody heavy chain, either alone or in combination. The term “variable” refers to the fact that certain segments of the variable regions differ extensively in sequence among antibodies. The variable regions of both the light (VL) and heavy (VH) chain portions mediate antigen binding and define the specificity of a particular antibody for its particular antigen. However, the variability is not evenly distributed across the entirety of the variable regions. Instead, the variable regions consist of relatively invariant stretches called framework regions (FRs) separated by shorter regions of extreme variability called complementarity determining regions (CDRs) or hypervariable regions. The variable regions of native heavy and light chains each comprise four FRs, largely adopting a betasheet configuration, connected by three CDRs, which form loops connecting, and in some cases forming part of, the beta-sheet structure. The CDRs complement an antigen’s shape and determine the antibody’s affinity and specificity for the antigen. There are six CDRs in both VL and VH. The CDRs in each chain are held together in close proximity by the FRs and, with the CDRs from the other chain, contribute to the formation of the antigen-binding site of antibodies (see Kabat et al., Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest, 5th Ed. Public Health Service, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Md. (1991)).
[0055] The term “hypervariable region” when used herein refers to the amino acid residues of an antibody that are responsible for antigen binding. The hypervariable region generally comprises amino acid residues from a “complementarity determining region” or “CDR” (e.g., around about residues 24-34 (LI), 50-56 (L2) and 89-97 (L3) in the VL, and around about 31-35 (Hl), 50-65 (H2) and 95-102 (H3) in the VH when numbered in accordance with the Kabat numbering system; Kabat et al., Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest, 5th Ed. Public Health Service, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Md. (1991)); and/or those residues from a “hypervariable loop” (e.g., residues 24- 34 (LI), 50-56 (L2) and 89-97 (L3) in the VL, and 26-32 (Hl), 52-56 (H2) and 95-101 (H3) in the VH when numbered in accordance with the Chothia numbering system; Chothia and Lesk, J. Mol. Biol. 196:901-917 (1987)); and/or those residues from a “hypervariable loop’VCDR (e.g., residues 27-38 (LI), 56-65 (L2) and 105-120 (L3) in the VL, and 27-38 (Hl), 56-65 (H2) and 105-120 (H3) in the VH when numbered in accordance with the IMGT numbering system; Lefranc, M. P. et al. Nucl. Acids Res. 27:209-212 (1999), Ruiz, M. et al. Nucl. Acids Res. 28:219-221 (2000)). Optionally the antibody has symmetrical insertions at one or more of the following points 28, 36 (LI), 63, 74-75 (L2) and 123 (L3) in the VL, and 28, 36 (Hl), 63, 74-75 (H2) and 123 (H3) in the VSUbH when numbered in accordance with AHo; Honneger, A. and Plunkthun, A. J. Mol. Biol. 309:657-670 (2001)). As used herein, a CDR may refer to CDRs defined by any of these numbering approaches or by a combination of approaches or by other desirable approaches. In addition, a new definition of highly conserved core, boundary and hyper-variable regions can be used.
[0056] A “constant region” of an antibody refers to the constant region of the antibody light chain or the constant region of the antibody heavy chain, either alone or in combination. The constant regions of the light chain (CL) and the heavy chain (CHI, CH2 or CH3, or CH4 in the case of IgM and IgE) confer important biological properties such as secretion, transplacental mobility, Fc receptor binding, complement binding, and the like. By convention the numbering of the constant region domains increases as they become more distal from the antigen binding site or amino-terminus of the antibody. The constant regions are not involved directly in binding an antibody to an antigen, but exhibit various effector functions, such as participation of the antibody in antibody dependent cellular cytotoxicity (ADCC), antibody-dependent cellular phagocytosis (ADCP), antibody-dependent neutrophil phagocytosis (ADNP), and antibody-dependent complement deposition (ADCD).
[0057] The antibody may be an antibody fragment. “Antibody fragments” comprise only a portion of an intact antibody, generally including an antigen binding site of the intact antibody and thus retaining the ability to bind antigen. Examples of antibody fragments encompassed by the present definition include: (i) the Fab fragment, having VL, CL, VH and CHI domains; (ii) the Fab' fragment, which is a Fab fragment having one or more cysteine residues at the C-terminus of the CHI domain; (iii) the Fd fragment having VH and CHI domains; (iv) the Fd' fragment having VH and Cnl domains and one or more cysteine residues at the C-terminus of the Cnl domain; (v) the Fv fragment having the VL and VH domains of a single antibody; (vi) the dAb fragment which consists of a VH domain; (vii) isolated CDR regions; (viii) F(ab')2 fragments, a bivalent fragment including two Fab' fragments linked by a disulfide bridge at the hinge region; (ix) single chain antibody molecules (e.g. single chain Fv; scFv); (x) “diabodies” with two antigen binding sites, comprising a heavy chain variable domain (VH) connected to a light chain variable domain (VL) in the same polypeptide chain; (xi) “linear antibodies” comprising a pair of tandem Fd segments (VH-CH1-VH-CH1) which, together with complementary light chain polypeptides, form a pair of antigen binding regions.
[0058] The antibody may be a chimeric antibody. “Chimeric antibodies” refers to those antibodies wherein one portion of each of the amino acid sequences of heavy and light chains is homologous to corresponding sequences in antibodies derived from a particular species or belonging to a particular class, while the remaining segment of the chains is homologous to corresponding sequences in another.
A. Monoclonal Antibodies
[0059] The term “monoclonal antibody” as used herein refers to an antibody obtained from a population of substantially homogeneous antibodies, i.e., the individual antibodies comprising the population are identical except for possible naturally occurring mutations that may be present in minor amounts. Monoclonal antibodies are highly specific, being directed against a single antigenic site. Furthermore, in contrast to polyclonal antibody preparations that include different antibodies directed against different determinants (epitopes), each monoclonal antibody is directed against a single determinant on the antigen. In addition to their specificity, monoclonal antibodies are advantageous in that they may be synthesized uncontaminated by other antibodies. The modifier “monoclonal” is not to be constmed as requiring production of the antibody by any particular method. For example, the monoclonal antibodies useful in the present disclosure may be prepared by the hybridoma methodology first described by Kohler et al., Nature, 256:495 (1975), or may be made using recombinant DNA methods in bacterial, eukaryotic animal or plant cells (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567) after single cell sorting of an antigen specific B cell, an antigen specific plasmablast responding to an infection or immunization, or capture of linked heavy and light chains from single cells in a bulk sorted antigen specific collection. The monoclonal antibodies may also be isolated from phage antibody libraries using the techniques described in Clackson et al., Nature, 352:624-628 (1991) and Marks et al., J. Mol. Biol., 222:581-597 (1991), for example.
[0060] Methods for producing monoclonal antibodies of various types, including chimeric and fully human, are well known in the art and highly predictable. For example, the following U.S. patents and patent applications provide enabling descriptions of such methods: U.S. Patent Application Nos. 2004/0126828 and 2002/0172677; and U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,817,837; 3,850,752; 3,939,350; 3,996,345; 4,196,265; 4,275,149; 4,277,437; 4,366,241;
4,469,797; 4,472,509; 4,606,855; 4,703,003; 4,742,159; 4,767,720; 4,816,567; 4,867,973;
4,938,948; 4,946,778; 5,021,236; 5,164,296; 5,196,066; 5,223,409; 5,403,484; 5,420,253;
5,565,332; 5,571,698; 5,627,052; 5,656,434; 5,770,376; 5,789,208; 5,821,337; 5,844,091;
5,858,657; 5,861,155; 5,871,907; 5,969,108; 6,054,297; 6,165,464; 6,365,157; 6,406,867;
6,709,659; 6,709,873; 6,753,407; 6,814,965; 6,849,259; 6,861,572; 6,875,434; and 6,891,024, each incorporated herein by reference.
[0061] In the case of human antibodies against natural pathogens, a suitable approach is to identify subjects that have been exposed to the pathogens, such as those who have been diagnosed as having contracted the disease, or those who have been vaccinated to generate protective immunity against the pathogen or to test the safety or efficacy of an experimental vaccine. Circulating anti-pathogen antibodies can be detected, and antibody encoding or producing B cells from the antibody -positive subject may then be obtained.
B. Single Chain Antibodies
[0062] A single chain variable fragment (scFv) is a fusion of the variable regions of the heavy and light chains of immunoglobulins, linked together with a short linker. This chimeric molecule retains the specificity of the original immunoglobulin, despite removal of the constant regions and the introduction of a linker peptide. This modification usually leaves the specificity unaltered. scFv can be created directly from subcloned heavy and light chains derived from a hybridoma or B cell. Single chain variable fragments lack the constant Fc region found in complete antibody molecules, and thus, the common binding sites (e.g., protein A/G) used to purify antibodies. These fragments can often be purified/immobilized using Protein L since Protein L interacts with the variable region of kappa light chains. [0063] Flexible linkers generally are comprised of helix- and turn-promoting amino acid residues such as alanine, serine and glycine. However, other residues can function as well. For example, the linker may have a proline residue two residues after the Vn C terminus and an abundance of arginines and prolines at other positions.
[0064] A single-chain antibody may also be created by joining receptor light and heavy chains using a non-peptide linker or chemical unit. Generally, the light and heavy chains will be produced in distinct cells, purified, and subsequently linked together in an appropriate fashion (i.e., the N-terminus of the heavy chain being attached to the C-terminus of the light chain via an appropriate chemical bridge).
[0065] Cross-linking reagents are used to form molecular bridges that tie functional groups of two different molecules, e.g., a stabilizing and coagulating agent. However, it is contemplated that dimers or multimers of the same analog or heteromeric complexes comprised of different analogs can be created. To link two different compounds in a step- wise manner, hetero-bifunctional cross-linkers can be used that eliminate unwanted homopolymer formation.
[0066] An exemplary hetero-bifunctional cross-linker contains two reactive groups: one reacting with primary amine group (e.g., N-hydroxy succinimide) and the other reacting with a thiol group (e.g., pyridyl disulfide, maleimides, halogens, etc.). Through the primary amine reactive group, the cross-linker may react with the lysine residue(s) of one protein (e.g., the selected antibody or fragment) and through the thiol reactive group, the cross-linker, already tied up to the first protein, reacts with the cysteine residue (free sulfhydryl group) of the other protein (e.g., the selective agent).
[0067] It is preferred that a cross-linker having reasonable stability in blood will be employed. Numerous types of disulfide -bond containing linkers are known that can be successfully employed to conjugate targeting and therapeutic/preventative agents. Linkers that contain a disulfide bond that is sterically hindered may prove to give greater stability in vivo, preventing release of the targeting peptide prior to reaching the site of action. These linkers are thus one group of linking agents.
[0068] For example, SMPT is a bifunctional cross-linker containing a disulfide bond that is “sterically hindered” by an adjacent benzene ring and methyl groups. It is believed that steric hindrance of the disulfide bond serves a function of protecting the bond from attack by thiolate anions such as glutathione which can be present in tissues and blood, and thereby help in preventing decoupling of the conjugate prior to the delivery of the attached agent to the target site. The SMPT cross-linking reagent, as with many other known cross-linking reagents, lends the ability to cross-link functional groups such as the SH of cysteine or primary amines (e.g., the epsilon amino group of lysine). Another possible type of crosslinker includes the hetero-bifunctional photoreactive phenylazides containing a cleavable disulfide bond such as sulfosuccinimidyl-2-(p-azido salicylamido) ethyl- 1,3'- dithiopropionate. The N-hydroxy-succinimidyl group reacts with primary amino groups and the phenylazide (upon photolysis) reacts non-selectively with any amino acid residue.
[0069] In addition to hindered cross-linkers, non-hindered linkers also can be employed in accordance herewith. Other useful cross-linkers, not considered to contain or generate a protected disulfide, include SATA, SPDP and 2-iminothiolane. The use of such cross-linkers is well understood in the art. Flexible linkers may also be used.
[0070] U.S. Patent 4,680,338, describes bifunctional linkers useful for producing conjugates of ligands with amine-containing polymers and/or proteins, especially for forming antibody conjugates with chelators, drugs, enzymes, detectable labels and the like. U.S. Patents 5,141,648 and 5,563,250 disclose cleavable conjugates containing a labile bond that is cleavable under a variety of mild conditions. This linker is particularly useful in that the agent of interest may be bonded directly to the linker, with cleavage resulting in release of the active agent. Particular uses include adding a free amino or free sulfhydryl group to a protein, such as an antibody, or a drug.
[0071] U.S. Patent 5,856,456 provides peptide linkers for use in connecting polypeptide constituents to make fusion proteins, e.g., single chain antibodies. The linker is up to about 50 amino acids in length, contains at least one occurrence of a charged amino acid (preferably arginine or lysine) followed by a proline, and is characterized by greater stability and reduced aggregation. U.S. Patent 5,880,270 discloses aminooxy-containing linkers useful in a variety of immunodiagnostic and separative techniques.
C. Bispecific and Multispecific Antibodies
[0072] Antibodies may be bispecific or multispecific. “Bispecific antibodies” are antibodies that have binding specificities for at least two different epitopes. Exemplar}' bispecific antibodies may bind to two different epitopes of a single antigen. Other such antibodies may combine a first antigen binding site with a binding site for a second antigen. Alternatively, an antigen- specific arm may be combined with an arm that binds to a triggering molecule on a leukocyte, such as a T-cell receptor molecule (e.g., CD3), or Fc receptors for IgG (FcyR), such as FcyRI (CD64), FcyRII (CD32) and Fc gamma RIII (CD16), so as to focus and localize cellular defense mechanisms to the infected cell. Bispecific antibodies may also be used to localize cytotoxic agents to infected cells. These antibodies possess an antigen-binding arm and an arm that binds the cytotoxic agent (e.g. , saporin, anti- interferon-a, vinca alkaloid, ricin A chain, methotrexate or radioactive isotope hapten). Bispecific antibodies can be prepared as full-length antibodies or antibody fragments (e.g., F(ab')2 bispecific antibodies). Taki et al. (2015) describes a bispecific anti-HSP70/anti-CD3 antibody.
[0073] Methods for making bispecific antibodies are known in the art. Traditional production of full-length bispecific antibodies is based on the co-expression of two immunoglobulin heavy chain- light chain pairs, where the two chains have different specificities. Because of the random assortment of immunoglobulin heavy and light chains, these hybridomas (quadromas) produce a potential mixture of ten different antibody molecules, of which only one has the correct bispecific structure. Purification of the correct molecule, which is usually done by affinity chromatography steps, is rather cumbersome, and the product yields are low.
[0074] According to a different approach, antibody variable regions with the desired binding specificities (antibody-antigen combining sites) are fused to immunoglobulin constant domain sequences. Preferably, the fusion is with an Ig heavy chain constant domain, comprising at least part of the hinge, CH2, and CH3 regions. It is preferred to have the first heavy-chain constant region (Cm) containing the site necessary for light chain bonding, present in at least one of the fusions. DNAs encoding the immunoglobulin heavy chain fusions and, if desired, the immunoglobulin light chain, are inserted into separate expression vectors, and are co-transfected into a suitable host cell. This provides for greater flexibility in adjusting the mutual proportions of the three polypeptide fragments when unequal ratios of the three polypeptide chains used in the construction provide the optimum yield of the desired bispecific antibody. It is, however, possible to insert the coding sequences for two or all three polypeptide chains into a single expression vector when the expression of at least two polypeptide chains in equal ratios results in high yields or when the ratios have no significant effect on the yield of the desired chain combination.
[0075] The bispecific antibodies may be composed of a hybrid immunoglobulin heavy chain with a first binding specificity in one arm, and a hybrid immunoglobulin heavy chain-light chain pair (providing a second binding specificity) in the other arm. This asymmetric structure facilitates the separation of the desired bispecific compound from unwanted immunoglobulin chain combinations, as the presence of an immunoglobulin light chain in only one half of the bispecific molecule provides for a facile way of separation. This approach is disclosed in WO 94/04690. For further details of generating bispecific antibodies see, for example, Suresh et al. , Methods in Enzymology, 121:210 (1986).
[0076] According to another approach described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,731,168, the interface between a pair of antibody molecules can be engineered to maximize the percentage of heterodimers that are recovered from recombinant cell culture. The preferred interface comprises at least a part of the CH3 domain. In this method, one or more small amino acid side chains from the interface of the first antibody molecule are replaced with larger side chains (e.g., tyrosine or tryptophan). Compensatory “cavities” of identical or similar size to the large side chain(s) are created on the interface of the second antibody molecule by replacing large amino acid side chains with smaller ones (e.g. , alanine or threonine). This provides a mechanism for increasing the yield of the heterodimer over other unwanted endproducts such as homodimers.
[0077] Bispecific antibodies include cross-linked or “heteroconjugate” antibodies. For example, one of the antibodies in the heteroconjugate can be coupled to avidin, the other to biotin. Such antibodies have, for example, been proposed to target immune system cells to unwanted cells (U.S. Pat. No. 4,676,980). Heteroconjugate antibodies may be made using any convenient cross-linking methods. Suitable cross-linking agents are well known in the art, and are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,676,980, along with a number of cross-linking techniques.
[0078] Techniques for generating bispecific antibodies from antibody fragments have also been described in the literature. For example, bispecific antibodies can be prepared using chemical linkage. Brennan et al., Science, 229: 81 (1985) describe a procedure wherein intact antibodies are proteolytically cleaved to generate F(ab')2 fragments. These fragments are reduced in the presence of the dithiol complexing agent, sodium arsenite, to stabilize vicinal dithiols and prevent intermolecular disulfide formation. The Fab' fragments generated are then converted to thionitrobenzoate (TNB) derivatives. One of the Fab'-TNB derivatives is then reconverted to the Fab'-thiol by reduction with mercaptoethylamine and is mixed with an equimolar amount of the other Fab’-TNB derivative to form the bispecific antibody. The bispecific antibodies produced can be used as agents for the selective immobilization of enzymes.
[0079] Techniques exist that facilitate the direct recovery of Fab'-SH fragments from E. coli, which can be chemically coupled to form bispecific antibodies. Shalaby et al., J. Exp. Med., 175: 217-225 (1992) describe the production of a bispecific antibody F(ab')2 molecule. Each Fab' fragment was separately secreted from E. coli and subjected to directed chemical coupling in vitro to form the bispecific antibody. The bispecific antibody thus formed was able to bind to cells overexpressing the ErbB2 receptor and normal human T cells, as well as trigger the lytic activity of human cytotoxic lymphocytes against human breast tumor targets.
[0080] Various techniques for making and isolating bispecific antibody fragments directly from recombinant cell culture have also been described (Merchant et al., Nat. Biotechnol. 16, 677--681 (1998)). For example, bispecific antibodies have been produced using leucine zippers (Kostelny et al., J. Immunol., 148(5): 1547-1553, 1992). The leucine zipper peptides from the Fos and Jun proteins were linked to the Fab’ portions of two different antibodies by gene fusion. The antibody homodimers were reduced at the hinge region to form monomers and then re-oxidized to form the antibody heterodimers. This method can also be utilized for the production of antibody homodimers. The “diabody” technology described by Hollinger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 90:6444-6448 (1993) has provided an alternative mechanism for making bispecific antibody fragments. The fragments comprise a Vn connected to a VL by a linker that is too short to allow pairing between the two domains on the same chain. Accordingly, the Vn and VL domains of one fragment are forced to pair with the complementary VL and Vn domains of another fragment, thereby forming two antigen-binding sites. Another strategy for making bispecific antibody fragments by the use of single-chain Fv (sFv) dimers has also been reported. See Gruber et al., J. Immunol., 152:5368 (1994).
[0081] A bispecific or multispecific antibody may be formed as a DOCK-AND- LOCK™ (DNL™) complex (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,521,056; 7,527,787; 7,534,866; 7,550,143 and 7,666,400). Generally, the technique takes advantage of the specific and high- affinity binding interactions that occur between a dimerization and docking domain (DDD) sequence of the regulatory (R) subunits of cAMP-dependent protein kinase (PKA) and an anchor domain (AD) sequence derived from any of a variety of AKAP proteins (Baillie et al., FEBS Letters. 2005; 579: 3264; Wong and Scott, Nat. Rev. Mol. Cell Biol. 2004; 5: 959). The DDD and AD peptides may be attached to any protein, peptide or other molecule. Because the DDD sequences spontaneously dimerize and bind to the AD sequence, the technique allows the formation of complexes between any selected molecules that may be attached to DDD or AD sequences.
[0082] Antibodies with more than two valencies are contemplated. For example, trispecific antibodies can be prepared (Tutt et al., J. Immunol. 147: 60, 1991; Xu et al., Science, 358(6359):85-90, 2017). The antibodies may also involve sequences or moieties that permit dimerization or multimerization of the receptors. Such sequences include those derived from IgA, which permit formation of multimers in conjunction with the J-chain. Another multimerization domain is the Gal4 dimerization domain.
[0083] A multivalent antibody may be internalized (and/or catabolized) faster than a bivalent antibody by a cell expressing an antigen to which the antibody binds. The antibodies of the present disclosure can be multivalent antibodies with three or more antigen binding sites (e.g., tetravalent antibodies), which can be readily produced by recombinant expression of nucleic acid encoding the polypeptide chains of the antibody. The multivalent antibody can comprise a dimerization domain and three or more antigen binding sites. The preferred dimerization domain comprises (or consists of) an Fc region or a hinge region. In this scenario, the antibody will comprise an Fc region and three or more antigen binding sites amino-terminal to the Fc region. Multivalent antibodies may comprise (or consist of) three to about eight, for example four, antigen binding sites. The multivalent antibody comprises at least one polypeptide chain (and preferably two polypeptide chains), wherein the polypeptide chain(s) comprise two or more variable regions. For instance, the polypeptide chain(s) may comprise VDl-(Xl).sub.n-VD2-(X2)n-Fc, wherein VD1 is a first variable region, VD2 is a second variable region, Fc is one polypeptide chain of an Fc region, XI and X2 represent an amino acid or polypeptide, and n is 0 or 1. For instance, the polypeptide chain(s) may comprise: VH-CH1 -flexible linker-VH-CHl-Fc region chain; or VH-CHl-VH-CHl-Fc region chain. The multivalent antibody herein may further comprise at least two (and preferably four) light chain variable region polypeptides. The multivalent antibody herein may, for instance, comprise from about two to about eight light chain variable region polypeptides. The light chain variable region polypeptides contemplated here comprise a light chain variable region and, optionally, further comprise a CL domain.
[0084] Charge modifications are particularly useful in the context of a multispecific antibody, where amino acid substitutions in Fab molecules result in reducing the mispairing of light chains with non-matching heavy chains (Bence-Jones-type side products), which can occur in the production of Fab-based bi-/multispecific antigen binding molecules with a VH/VL exchange in one (or more, in case of molecules comprising more than two antigenbinding Fab molecules) of their binding arms (see also PCT publication no. WO 2015/150447, particularly the examples therein, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
D. BiTES
[0085] A bi-specific T-cell engagers (BiTE®) is an artificial bispecific monoclonal antibody that directs a host’s immune system, more specifically the T cells’ cytotoxic activity, to target diseased cells. BiTEs are fusion proteins consisting of two single-chain variable fragments (scFvs) of different antibodies, or amino acid sequences from four different genes, on a single peptide chain of about 55 kilodaltons. One of the scFvs binds to T cells via the CD3 receptor, and the other to an infected cell via a specific molecule.
[0086] Like other bispecific antibodies, and unlike ordinary monoclonal antibodies, BiTEs form a link between T cells and target cells. This causes T cells to exert cytotoxic activity on target cells by producing proteins like perforin and granzymes, independently of the presence of MHC I or co- stimulatory molecules. These proteins enter the target cells and initiate apoptosis. This action mimics physiological processes observed during T cell attacks against infected cells.
E. Antibody Conjugates
[0087] Antibodies of the present disclosure may be linked to at least one agent to form an antibody conjugate. The conjugate can be, for example, an antibody conjugated to another proteinaceous, carbohydrate, lipid, or mixed moiety molecule(s). Such antibody conjugates include, but are not limited to, modifications that include linking the antibody to one or more polymers. For example, an antibody may be linked to one or more water-soluble polymers. Linkage to a water-soluble polymer reduces the likelihood that the antibody will precipitate in an aqueous environment, such as a physiological environment. One skilled in the art can select a suitable water-soluble polymer based on considerations including, but not limited to, whether the polymer/antibody conjugate will be used in the treatment of a patient and, if so, the pharmacological profile of the antibody (e.g., half-life, dosage, activity, antigenicity, and/or other factors).
[0088] In order to increase the efficacy of antibody molecules as diagnostic or therapeutic agents, it is conventional to link or covalently bind or complex at least one desired molecule or moiety. Such a molecule or moiety may be, but is not limited to, at least one effector or reporter molecule. Effector molecules comprise molecules having a desired activity, e.g., cytotoxic activity. Non-limiting examples of effector molecules which have been attached to antibodies include toxins, anti-tumor agents, therapeutic enzymes, radionuclides, antiviral agents, chelating agents, cytokines, growth factors, and oligo- or polynucleotides. By contrast, a reporter molecule is defined as any moiety which may be detected using an assay. Non-limiting examples of reporter molecules which have been conjugated to antibodies include enzymes, radiolabels, haptens, fluorescent labels, phosphorescent molecules, chemiluminescent molecules, chromophores, photoaffinity molecules, colored particles or ligands, an enzyme (e.g., that catalyzes a colorimetric or fluorometric reaction), a substrate, a solid matrix, such as biotin. An antibody may comprise one, two, or more of any of these labels.
[0089] Antibody conjugates may be used to deliver cytotoxic agents to target cells. Cytotoxic agents of this type may improve antibody-mediated cytotoxicity, and include such moieties as cytokines that directly or indirectly stimulate cell death, radioisotopes, chemotherapeutic drugs (including prodrugs), bacterial toxins (e.g., pseudomonas exotoxin, diphtheria toxin, etc.), plant toxins (e.g., ricin, gelonin, etc.), chemical conjugates (e.g., maytansinoid toxins, auristatins, a-amanitin, anthracy clines, calechaemicin, etc.), radioconjugates, enzyme conjugates (e.g., RNase conjugates, granzyme antibody-directed enzyme/prodrug therapy), and the like.
[0090] Antibody conjugates are also used as diagnostic agents. Antibody diagnostics generally fall within two classes, those for use in in vitro diagnostics, such as in a variety of immunoassays, and those for use in vivo diagnostic protocols, generally known as “antibody-directed imaging.” Many appropriate imaging agents are known in the art, as are methods for their attachment to antibodies (see, for e.g., U.S. Patents 5,021,236, 4,938,948, and 4,472,509). The imaging moieties used can be paramagnetic ions, radioactive isotopes, fluorochromes, NMR-detectable substances, and X-ray imaging agents.
[0091] The paramagnetic ions contemplated for use as conjugates include chromium (III), manganese (II), iron (III), iron (II), cobalt (II), nickel (II), copper (II), neodymium (III), samarium (III), ytterbium (III), gadolinium (III), vanadium (II), terbium (III), dysprosium (III), holmium (III) and/or erbium (III), with gadolinium being particularly preferred. Ions useful in other contexts, such as X-ray imaging, include but are not limited to lanthanum (III), gold (III), lead (II), and bismuth (III).
[0092] The radioactive isotopes contemplated for use as conjugated include astatine211, 14carbon, 51chromium, 36chlorine, 57cobalt, 58cobalt, copper67, 152Eu, gallium67, 3hydrogen, iodine123, iodine125, iodine131, indium111, 59iron, 32phosphorus, rhenium186, rhenium188, 75selenium, 35sulphur, technicium99'" and/or yttrium90. 125I is often being preferred. Technicium"m and/or indium111 are also often preferred due to their low energy and suitability for long range detection. Radioactively labeled monoclonal antibodies of the present disclosure may be produced according to well-known methods in the art. For instance, monoclonal antibodies can be iodinated by contact with sodium and/or potassium iodide and a chemical oxidizing agent such as sodium hypochlorite, or an enzymatic oxidizing agent, such as lactoperoxidase. Monoclonal antibodies according to the disclosure may be labeled with technetium991 by ligand exchange process, for example, by reducing pertechnate with stannous solution, chelating the reduced technetium onto a Sephadex column and applying the antibody to this column. Alternatively, direct labeling techniques may be used, e.g., by incubating pertechnate, a reducing agent such as SNCh, a buffer solution such as sodium-potassium phthalate solution, and the antibody. Intermediary functional groups which are often used to bind radioisotopes which exist as metallic ions to antibody are diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid (DTP A) or ethylene diaminetetracetic acid (EDTA).
[0093] The fluorescent labels contemplated for use as conjugates include Alexa 350, Alexa 430, AMCA, BODIPY 630/650, BODIPY 650/665, BODIPY-FL, BODIPY-R6G, BODIPY-TMR, BODIPY-TRX, Cascade Blue, Cy3, Cy5,6-FAM, Fluorescein Isothiocyanate, HEX, 6-JOE, Oregon Green 488, Oregon Green 500, Oregon Green 514, Pacific Blue, REG, Rhodamine Green, Rhodamine Red, Renographin, ROX, TAMRA, TET, tetramethylrhodamine, and/or Texas Red.
[0094] Additional types of antibodies contemplated in the present disclosure are those intended primarily for use in vitro, where the antibody is linked to a secondary binding ligand and/or to an enzyme (an enzyme tag) that will generate a colored product upon contact with a chromogenic substrate. Examples of suitable enzymes include urease, alkaline phosphatase, (horseradish) hydrogen peroxidase or glucose oxidase. Preferred secondary binding ligands are biotin and avidin and streptavidin compounds.
[0095] Several methods are known in the art for the attachment or conjugation of an antibody to its conjugate moiety. Some attachment methods involve the use of a metal chelate complex employing, for example, an organic chelating agent such a diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid anhydride (DTP A); ethylenetriaminetetraacetic acid; N- chloro-p-toluenesulfonamide; and/or tetrachloro-3a-6a-diphenylglycouril-3 attached to the antibody (U.S. Patents 4,472,509 and 4,938,948). Monoclonal antibodies may also be reacted with an enzyme in the presence of a coupling agent such as glutaraldehyde or periodate. Conjugates with fluorescein markers are prepared in the presence of these coupling agents or by reaction with an isothiocyanate. In U.S. Patent 4,938,948, imaging of breast tumors is achieved using monoclonal antibodies and the detectable imaging moieties are bound to the antibody using linkers such as methyl-p-hydroxybenzimidate or N-succinimidyl-3-(4- hydroxyphenyl)propionate.
[0096] Another known method of site-specific attachment of molecules to antibodies comprises the reaction of antibodies with hapten-based affinity labels. Essentially, haptenbased affinity labels react with amino acids in the antigen binding site, thereby destroying this site and blocking specific antigen reaction. However, this may not be advantageous since it results in loss of antigen binding by the antibody conjugate.
[0097] Molecules containing azido groups may also be used to form covalent bonds to proteins through reactive nitrene intermediates that are generated by low intensity ultraviolet light. In particular, 2- and 8-azido analogues of purine nucleotides have been used as site-directed photoprobes to identify nucleotide binding proteins in crude cell extracts. The 2- and 8-azido nucleotides have also been used to map nucleotide binding domains of purified proteins and may be used as antibody binding agents. [0098] Derivatization of immunoglobulins by selectively introducing sulfhydryl groups in the Fc region of an immunoglobulin, using reaction conditions that do not alter the antibody combining site are also contemplated. Antibody conjugates produced according to this methodology are disclosed to exhibit improved longevity, specificity and sensitivity (U.S. Patent 5,196,066, incorporated herein by reference). Site-specific attachment of effector or reporter molecules, wherein the reporter or effector molecule is conjugated to a carbohydrate residue in the Fc region have also been disclosed in the literature. This approach has been reported to produce diagnostically and therapeutically promising antibodies which are currently in clinical evaluation.
F. Antibody Drug Conjugates
[0099] Antibody drug conjugates, or ADCs, are a class of highly potent biopharmaceutical drugs designed as a targeted therapy for the treatment of people with disease. ADCs are complex molecules composed of an antibody (a whole mAb or an antibody fragment, such as a scFv) linked, via a stable chemical linker with labile bonds, to a biological active cytotoxic/anti-viral payload or drug. Antibody drug conjugates are examples of bioconjugates and immunoconjugates.
[00100] By combining the unique targeting capabilities of monoclonal antibodies with the cancer-killing ability of cytotoxic drugs, antibody-drug conjugates allow sensitive discrimination between healthy and diseased tissue. This means that, in contrast to traditional systemic approaches, antibody-drug conjugates target and attack the diseased cell so that healthy cells are less severely affected.
[00101] In the development ADC-based anti-tumor therapies, an anticancer drug (e.g., a cell toxin or cytotoxin) is coupled to an antibody that specifically targets a certain cell marker e.g., a protein that, ideally, is only to be found in or on diseased cells). Antibodies track these proteins down in the body and attach themselves to the surface of the diseased cells. The biochemical reaction between the antibody and the target protein (antigen) triggers a signal in the targeted cell, which then absorbs or internalizes the antibody together with the cytotoxin. After the ADC is internalized, the cytotoxic drug is released and kills the cell or impairs cellular replication. Due to this targeting, ideally the drug has lower side effects and gives a wider therapeutic window than other agents. [00102] A stable link between the antibody and cytotoxic agent is a crucial aspect of an ADC. Linkers are based on chemical motifs including disulfides, hydrazones or peptides (cleavable), or thioethers (noncleavable) and control the distribution and delivery of the cytotoxic agent to the target cell. Cleavable and noncleavable types of linkers have been proven to be safe in preclinical and clinical trials. Brentuximab vedotin includes an enzymesensitive cleavable linker that delivers the potent and highly toxic antimicrotubule agent Monomethyl auristatin E or MMAE, a synthetic antineoplastic agent, to human specific CD30-positive malignant cells. Because of its high toxicity MMAE, which inhibits cell division by blocking the polymerization of tubulin, cannot be used as a single-agent chemotherapeutic drug. However, the combination of MMAE linked to an anti-CD30 monoclonal antibody (cAClO, a cell membrane protein of the tumor necrosis factor or TNF receptor) proved to be stable in extracellular fluid, cleavable by cathepsin and safe for therapy. Trastuzumab emtansine, the other approved ADC, is a combination of the microtubule-formation inhibitor mertansine (DM-1), a derivative of the Maytansine, and antibody trastuzumab (Herceptin®/Genentech/Roche) attached by a stable, non-cleavable linker.
[00103] The availability of better and more stable linkers has changed the function of the chemical bond. The type of linker, cleavable or noncleavable, lends specific properties to the cytotoxic (e.g., anti-cancer) drug. For example, a non-cleavable linker keeps the drug within the cell. As a result, the entire antibody, linker, and cytotoxic agent enter the targeted cell where the antibody is degraded to the level of amino acids. The resulting complex - amino acid, linker and cytotoxic agent - now becomes the active drug. In contrast, cleavable linkers are catalyzed by enzymes in the host cell, thereby releasing the cytotoxic agent.
[00104] Another type of cleavable linker adds an extra molecule between the cytotoxic drug and the cleavage site. This linker technology allows researchers to create ADCs with more flexibility without worrying about changing cleavage kinetics. Researchers are also developing a new method of peptide cleavage based on Edman degradation. Future direction in the development of ADCs also include the development of site-specific conjugation (TDCs) to further improve stability and therapeutic index and a-emitting immunoconjugates and antibody-conjugated nanoparticles. G. Intrabodies
[00105] In a particular embodiment, the antibody is a recombinant antibody that is suitable for action inside of a cell - such antibodies are known as “intrabodies.” These antibodies may interfere with target function by a variety of mechanisms, such as by altering intracellular protein trafficking, interfering with enzymatic function, and blocking proteinprotein or protein-DNA interactions. In many ways, their structures mimic or parallel those of single chain and single domain antibodies, discussed above. Indeed, single-transcript/single- chain is an important feature that permits intracellular expression in a target cell, and also makes protein transit across cell membranes more feasible. However, additional features are required. An additional feature that intrabodies may require is a signal for intracellular targeting. Vectors that can target intrabodies (or other proteins) to subcellular regions such as the cytoplasm, nucleus, mitochondria and ER have been designed and are commercially available (Invitrogen Corp.).
[00106] The two major issues impacting the implementation of intrabody therapeutics are delivery, including cell/tissue targeting, and stability. With respect to delivery, a variety of approaches have been employed, such as tissue-directed delivery, use of cell-type specific promoters, viral-based delivery, use of cell-permeability /membrane translocating peptides, and delivery using exosomes. One means of delivery comprises the use of lipid-based nanoparticles, or exosomes, as taught in U.S. Pat. Appln. Publn. 2018/0177727, which is incorporated by reference here in its entirety. With respect to stability, the approach is generally to either screen by brute force, including methods that involve phage display and may include sequence maturation or development of consensus sequences, or more directed modifications such as insertion stabilizing sequences (<?.g., Fc regions, chaperone protein sequences, leucine zippers) and disulfide replacement/modification.
H. Production and Purification of Antibodies
[00107] The methods for generating monoclonal antibodies generally begin along the same lines as those for preparing polyclonal antibodies. The first step for both of these methods is immunization of an appropriate host. As is well known in the art, a given composition for immunization may vary in its immunogenicity. It is often necessary therefore to boost the host immune system, as may be achieved by coupling a peptide or polypeptide immunogen to a carrier. Exemplary and preferred carriers are keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH) and bovine serum albumin (BSA). Other albumins such as ovalbumin, mouse serum albumin or rabbit serum albumin can also be used as carriers. Means for conjugating a polypeptide to a carrier protein are well known in the art and include glutaraldehyde, m- maleimidobencoyl-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester, carbodiimyde and bis-biazotized benzidine. As also is well known in the art, the immunogenicity of a particular immunogen composition can be enhanced by the use of non-specific stimulators of the immune response, known as adjuvants. Exemplary and preferred adjuvants in animals include complete Freund’s adjuvant (a non-specific stimulator of the immune response containing killed Mycobacterium tuberculosis), incomplete Freund’s adjuvants and aluminum hydroxide adjuvant and in humans include alum, CpG, MFP59, and combinations of immunostimulatory molecules (“Adjuvant Systems”, such as AS01 or AS03). Additional experimental forms of inoculation to induce antigen-specific B cells are possible, including nanoparticle vaccines, or gene- encoded antigens delivered as DNA or RNA genes in a physical delivery system (such as lipid nanoparticle or on a gold biolistic bead), and delivered with needle, gene gun, or transcutaneous electroporation device. The antigen gene also can be carried as encoded by a replication competent or defective viral vector such as adenovirus, adeno-associated virus, poxvirus, herpesvirus, or alphavirus replicon, or alternatively a virus-like particle.
[00108] Methods for generating hybrids of antibody -producing spleen or lymph node cells and myeloma cells usually comprise mixing somatic cells with myeloma cells in a 2:1 proportion, though the proportion may vary from about 20: 1 to about 1:1, in the presence of an agent or agents (chemical or electrical) that promote the fusion of cell membranes. In some cases, transformation of human B cells with Epstein Barr virus (EBV) as an initial step increases the size of the B cells, enhancing fusion with the relatively large-sized myeloma cells. Transformation efficiency by EBV is enhanced by using CpG and a Chk2 inhibitor drug in the transforming medium. Alternatively, human B cells can be activated by co-culture with transfected cell lines expressing CD40 Ligand (CD 154) in medium containing additional soluble factors, such as IL-21 and human B cell Activating Factor (BAFF), a Type II member of the TNF superfamily. Fusion methods using Sendai vims or polyethylene glycol (PEG) are also known. The use of electrically induced fusion methods is also appropriate. Fusion procedures usually produce viable hybrids at low frequencies, about 1 x 10’6 to 1 x 10“8, but with optimized procedures one can achieve fusion efficiencies close to 1 in 200. However, relatively low efficiency of fusion does not pose a problem, as the viable, fused hybrids are differentiated from the parental, infused cells (particularly the infused myeloma cells that would normally continue to divide indefinitely) by culturing in a selective medium. The selective medium is generally one that contains an agent that blocks the de novo synthesis of nucleotides in the tissue culture medium. Exemplary and preferred agents are aminopterin, methotrexate, and azaserine. Aminopterin and methotrexate block de novo synthesis of both purines and pyrimidines, whereas azaserine blocks only purine synthesis. Where aminopterin or methotrexate is used, the medium is supplemented with hypoxanthine and thymidine as a source of nucleotides (HAT medium). Where azaserine is used, the medium is supplemented with hypoxanthine. Ouabain is added if the B cell source is an EBV-transformed human B cell line, in order to eliminate EBV-transformed lines that have not fused to the myeloma.
[00109] The preferred selection medium is HAT or HAT with ouabain. Only cells capable of operating nucleotide salvage pathways are able to survive in HAT medium. The myeloma cells are defective in key enzymes of the salvage pathway, e.g., hypoxanthine phosphoribosyl transferase (HPRT), and they cannot survive. The B cells can operate this pathway, but they have a limited life span in culture and generally die within about two weeks. Therefore, the only cells that can survive in the selective media are those hybrids formed from myeloma and B cells. When the source of B cells used for fusion is a line of EBV-transformed B cells, as here, ouabain may also be used for drug selection of hybrids as EBV-transformed B cells are susceptible to drug killing, whereas the myeloma partner used is chosen to be ouabain resistant.
[00110] Culturing provides a population of hybridomas from which specific hybridomas are selected. Typically, selection of hybridomas is performed by culturing the cells by single-clone dilution in microtiter plates, followed by testing the individual clonal supernatants (after about two to three weeks) for the desired reactivity. The assay should be sensitive, simple and rapid, such as radioimmunoassays, enzyme immunoassays, cytotoxicity assays, plaque assays dot immunobinding assays, and the like. The selected hybridomas are then serially diluted or single-cell sorted by flow cytometric sorting and cloned into individual antibody-producing cell lines, which clones can then be propagated indefinitely to provide monoclonal antibodies. The cell lines may be exploited for monoclonal antibody production in two basic ways. A sample of the hybridoma can be injected (often into the peritoneal cavity) into an animal (e.g., a mouse). Optionally, the animals are primed with a hydrocarbon, especially oils such as pristane (tetramethylpentadecane) prior to injection. When human hybridomas are used in this way, it is optimal to inject immunocompromised mice, such as SCID mice, to prevent tumor rejection. The injected animal develops tumors secreting the specific monoclonal antibody produced by the fused cell hybrid. The body fluids of the animal, such as serum or ascites fluid, can then be tapped to provide monoclonal antibodies in high concentration. The individual cell lines could also be cultured in vitro, where the monoclonal antibodies are naturally secreted into the culture medium from which they can be readily obtained in high concentrations. Alternatively, human hybridoma cells lines can be used in vitro to produce immunoglobulins in cell supernatant. The cell lines can be adapted for growth in serum-free medium to optimize the ability to recover human monoclonal immunoglobulins of high purity.
[00111] Hybridomas may be cultured, then cells lysed, and total RNA extracted. Random hexamers may be used with RT to generate cDNA copies of RNA, and then PCR performed using a multiplex mixture of PCR primers expected to amplify all human variable gene sequences. PCR product can be cloned into pGEM-T Easy vector, then sequenced by automated DNA sequencing using standard vector primers. Assay of binding and neutralization may be performed using antibodies collected from hybridoma supernatants and purified by FPLC, using Protein G columns.
[00112] Recombinant full-length IgG antibodies can be generated by subcloning heavy and light chain Fv DNAs from the cloning vector into an IgG plasmid vector, transfected into 293 (e.g. , Freestyle) cells or CHO cells, and antibodies can be collected and purified from the 293 or CHO cell supernatant. Other appropriate host cells systems include bacteria, such as E. coli, insect cells (S2, Sf9, Sf29, High Five), plant cells (e.g., tobacco, with or without engineering for human- like glycans), algae, or in a variety of non-human transgenic contexts, such as mice, rats, goats or cows.
[00113] Expression of nucleic acids encoding antibodies, both for the purpose of subsequent antibody purification, and for immunization of a host, is also contemplated. Antibody coding sequences can be RNA, such as native RNA or modified RNA. Modified RNA contemplates certain chemical modifications that confer increased stability and low immunogenicity to mRNAs, thereby facilitating expression of therapeutically important proteins. For instance, Nl-methyl-pseudouridine (NlnTP) outperforms several other nucleoside modifications and their combinations in terms of translation capacity. In addition to turning off the immune/eIF2a phosphorylation-dependent inhibition of translation, incorporated Nlm'P nucleotides dramatically alter the dynamics of the translation process by increasing ribosome pausing and density on the mRNA. Increased ribosome loading of modified mRNAs renders them more permissive for initiation by favoring either ribosome recycling on the same mRNA or de novo ribosome recruitment. Such modifications could be used to enhance antibody expression in vivo following inoculation with RNA. The RNA, whether native or modified, may be delivered as naked RNA or in a delivery vehicle, such as a lipid nanoparticle.
[00114] Alternatively, DNA encoding the antibody may be employed for the same purposes. The DNA is included in an expression cassette comprising a promoter active in the host cell for which it is designed. The expression cassette is advantageously included in a replicable vector, such as a conventional plasmid or minivector. Vectors include viral vectors, such as poxviruses, adenoviruses, herpesviruses, adeno-associated viruses, and lentiviruses are contemplated. Replicons encoding antibody genes such as alphavirus replicons based on VEE virus or Sindbis virus are also contemplated. Delivery of such vectors can be performed by needle through intramuscular, subcutaneous, or intradermal routes, or by transcutaneous electroporation when in vivo expression is desired.
[00115] Alternatively, a molecular cloning approach may be used to generate monoclonal antibodies. Single B cells labeled with the antigen of interest can be sorted physically using paramagnetic bead selection or flow cytometric sorting, then RNA can be isolated from the single cells and antibody genes amplified by RT-PCR. Alternatively, antigen-specific bulk sorted populations of cells can be segregated into microvesicles and the matched heavy and light chain variable genes recovered from single cells using physical linkage of heavy and light chain amplicons, or common barcoding of heavy and light chain genes from a vesicle. Matched heavy and light chain genes form single cells also can be obtained from populations of antigen specific B cells by treating cells with cell-penetrating nanoparticles bearing RT-PCR primers and barcodes for marking transcripts with one barcode per cell. The antibody variable genes also can be isolated by RNA extraction of a hybridoma line and the antibody genes obtained by RT-PCR and cloned into an immunoglobulin expression vector. Alternatively, combinatorial immunoglobulin phagemid libraries are prepared from RNA isolated from the cell lines and phagemids expressing appropriate antibodies are selected by panning using viral antigens. The advantages of this approach over conventional hybridoma techniques are that approximately 104 times as many antibodies can be produced and screened in a single round, and that new specificities are generated by H and L chain combination which further increases the chance of finding appropriate antibodies.
[00116] Other U.S. patents, each incorporated herein by reference, that teach the production of antibodies useful in the present disclosure include U.S. Patent 5,565,332, which describes the production of chimeric antibodies using a combinatorial approach; U.S. Patent 4,816,567 which describes recombinant immunoglobulin preparations; and U.S. Patent 4,867,973 which describes antibody-therapeutic agent conjugates.
[00117] Monoclonal antibodies produced by any means may be purified, if desired, using filtration, centrifugation, and various chromatographic methods, such as FPLC or affinity chromatography. Fragments of the monoclonal antibodies of the disclosure can be obtained from the purified monoclonal antibodies by methods that include digestion with enzymes, such as pepsin or papain, and/or by cleavage of disulfide bonds by chemical reduction. Alternatively, monoclonal antibody fragments encompassed by the present disclosure can be synthesized using an automated peptide synthesizer.
[00118] The antibodies of the present disclosure may be purified. The term “purified,” as used herein, is intended to refer to a composition, isolatable from other components, wherein the protein is purified to any degree relative to its naturally obtainable state. A purified protein therefore also refers to a protein, free from the environment in which it may naturally occur. Where the term “substantially purified” is used, this designation will refer to a composition in which the protein or peptide forms the major component of the composition, such as constituting about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90%, about 95% or more of the proteins in the composition.
[00119] Protein purification techniques are well known to those of skill in the art. These techniques involve, at one level, the crude fractionation of the cellular milieu to polypeptide and non-polypeptide fractions. Having separated the polypeptide from other proteins, the polypeptide of interest may be further purified using chromatographic and electrophoretic techniques to achieve partial or complete purification (or purification to homogeneity). Analytical methods particularly suited to the preparation of a pure peptide are ion-exchange chromatography, exclusion chromatography; polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis; isoelectric focusing. Other methods for protein purification include, precipitation with ammonium sulfate, PEG, antibodies and the like or by heat denaturation, followed by centrifugation; gel filtration, reverse phase, hydroxylapatite and affinity chromatography; and combinations of such and other techniques.
[00120] In purifying an antibody of the present disclosure, it may be desirable to express the polypeptide in a prokaryotic or eukaryotic expression system and extract the protein using denaturing conditions. The polypeptide may be purified from other cellular components using an affinity column, which binds to a tagged portion of the polypeptide. As is generally known in the art, it is believed that the order of conducting the various purification steps may be changed, or that certain steps may be omitted, and still result in a suitable method for the preparation of a substantially purified protein or peptide.
[00121] Commonly, complete antibodies are fractionated utilizing agents (i.e., protein A) that bind the Fc portion of the antibody. Alternatively, antigens may be used to simultaneously purify and select appropriate antibodies. Such methods often utilize the selection agent bound to a support, such as a column, filter or bead. The antibodies are bound to a support, contaminants removed (e.g., washed away), and the antibodies released by applying conditions (salt, heat, etc.).
[00122] Various methods for quantifying the degree of purification of the protein or peptide will be known to those of skill in the art in light of the present disclosure. These include, for example, determining the specific activity of an active fraction, or assessing the amount of polypeptides within a fraction by SDS/PAGE analysis. Another method for assessing the purity of a fraction is to calculate the specific activity of the fraction, to compare it to the specific activity of the initial extract, and to thus calculate the degree of purity. The actual units used to represent the amount of activity will, of course, be dependent upon the particular assay technique chosen to follow the purification and whether or not the expressed protein or peptide exhibits a detectable activity.
[00123] It is known that the migration of a polypeptide can vary, sometimes significantly, with different conditions of SDS/PAGE. It will therefore be appreciated that under differing electrophoresis conditions, the apparent molecular weights of purified or partially purified expression products may vary. I. Modification of Antibodies
[00124] The sequences of antibodies may be modified for a variety of reasons, such as improved expression, improved cross-reactivity, or diminished off-target binding. Modified antibodies may be made by any technique known to those of skill in the art, including expression through standard molecular biological techniques, or the chemical synthesis of polypeptides.
[00125] For example, one may wish to make modifications, such as introducing conservative changes into an antibody molecule. In making such changes, the hydropathic index of amino acids may be considered. The importance of the hydropathic amino acid index in conferring interactive biologic function on a protein is generally understood in the art (Kyte and Doolittle, 1982). It is accepted that the relative hydropathic character of the amino acid contributes to the secondary structure of the resultant protein, which in turn defines the interaction of the protein with other molecules, for example, enzymes, substrates, receptors, DNA, antibodies, antigens, and the like.
[00126] The substitution of like amino acids can be made effectively on the basis of hydrophilicity. U.S. Patent 4,554,101, incorporated herein by reference, states that the greatest local average hydrophilicity of a protein, as governed by the hydrophilicity of its adjacent amino acids, correlates with a biological property of the protein. As detailed in U.S. Patent 4,554,101, the following hydrophilicity values have been assigned to amino acid residues: basic amino acids: arginine (+3.0), lysine (+3.0), and histidine (-0.5); acidic amino acids: aspartate (+3.0 + 1), glutamate (+3.0 + 1), asparagine (+0.2), and glutamine (+0.2); hydrophilic, nonionic amino acids: serine (+0.3), asparagine (+0.2), glutamine (+0.2), and threonine (-0.4), sulfur containing amino acids: cysteine (-1.0) and methionine (-1.3); hydrophobic, nonaromatic amino acids: valine (-1.5), leucine (-1.8), isoleucine (-1.8), proline (-0.5 + 1), alanine (-0.5), and glycine (0); hydrophobic, aromatic amino acids: tryptophan (- 3.4), phenylalanine (-2.5), and tyrosine (-2.3).
[00127] An amino acid can be substituted for another having a similar hydrophilicity and produce a biologically or immunologically modified protein. In such changes, the substitution of amino acids whose hydrophilicity values are within + 2 is preferred, those that are within + 1 are particularly preferred, and those within + 0.5 are even more particularly preferred. [00128] Amino acid substitutions generally are based on the relative similarity of the amino acid side-chain substituents, for example, their hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, charge, size, and the like. Exemplary substitutions that take into consideration the various foregoing characteristics are well known to those of skill in the art and include: arginine and lysine; glutamate and aspartate; serine and threonine; glutamine and asparagine; and valine, leucine and isoleucine.
[00129] The present disclosure also contemplates isotype modification. By modifying the Fc region to have a different isotype, different functionalities can be achieved. For example, changing to IgGi can increase antibody dependent cell cytotoxicity, switching to class A can improve tissue distribution, and switching to class M can improve valency.
[00130] One can design an Fc region of an antibody with altered effector function, e.g., by modifying Clq binding and/or FcyR binding and thereby changing CDC activity and/or ADCC activity. “Effector functions” are responsible for activating or diminishing a biological activity (e.g., in a subject). Examples of effector functions include, but are not limited to: Clq binding; complement dependent cytotoxicity (CDC); Fc receptor binding; antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity (ADCC); phagocytosis; down regulation of cell surface receptors (e.g., B cell receptor; BCR), etc. Such effector functions may require the Fc region to be combined with a binding domain (e.g., an antibody variable domain) and can be assessed using various assays (e.g., Fc binding assays, ADCC assays, CDC assays, etc.).
[00131] For example, one can generate a variant Fc region of an antibody with improved Clq binding and improved FcyRIII binding (e.g., having both improved ADCC activity and improved CDC activity). Alternatively, if it is desired that effector function be reduced or ablated, a variant Fc region can be engineered with reduced CDC activity and/or reduced ADCC activity. In other embodiments, only one of these activities may be increased, and, optionally, also the other activity reduced (e.g., to generate an Fc region variant with improved ADCC activity, but reduced CDC activity and vice versa).
[00132] An isolated monoclonal antibody, or antigen binding fragment thereof, may contain a substantially homogeneous glycan without sialic acid, galactose, or fucose. The aforementioned substantially homogeneous glycan may be covalently attached to the heavy chain constant region. [00133] A monoclonal antibody may have a novel Fc glycosylation pattern. Glycosylation of an Fc region is typically either N-linked or O-linked. N-linked refers to the attachment of the carbohydrate moiety to the side chain of an asparagine residue. O-linked glycosylation refers to the attachment of one of the sugars N-acetylgalactosamine, galactose, or xylose to a hydroxyamino acid, most commonly serine or threonine, although 5- hydroxyproline or 5-hydroxylysine may also be used. The recognition sequences for enzymatic attachment of the carbohydrate moiety to the asparagine side chain peptide sequences are asparagine-X-serine and asparagine-X-threonine, where X is any amino acid except proline. Thus, the presence of either of these peptide sequences in a polypeptide creates a potential glycosylation site.
[00134] The glycosylation pattern may be altered, for example, by deleting one or more glycosylation site(s) found in the polypeptide, and/or adding one or more glycosylation site(s) that are not present in the polypeptide. Addition of glycosylation sites to the Fc region of an antibody is conveniently accomplished by altering the amino acid sequence such that it contains one or more of the above-described tripeptide sequences (for N-linked glycosylation sites). An exemplary glycosylation variant has an amino acid substitution of residue Asn 297 of the heavy chain. The alteration may also be made by the addition of, or substitution by, one or more serine or threonine residues to the sequence of the original polypeptide (for O-linked glycosylation sites). Additionally, a change of Asn 297 to Ala can remove one of the glycosylation sites.
[00135] The isolated monoclonal antibody, or antigen binding fragment thereof, may be present in a substantially homogenous composition represented by the GNGN or G1/G2 glycoform, which exhibits increased binding affinity for Fc gamma RI and Fc gamma RIII compared to the same antibody without the substantially homogeneous GNGN glycoform and with GO, GIF, G2F, GNF, GNGNF or GNGNFX containing glycoforms. Fc glycosylation plays a significant role in anti-viral and anti-cancer properties of therapeutic mAbs. Elimination of core fucose dramatically improves the ADCC activity of mAbs mediated by natural killer (NK) cells but appears to have the opposite effect on the ADCC activity of polymorphonuclear cells (PMNs).
[00136] The isolated monoclonal antibody, or antigen binding fragment thereof, may be expressed in cells that express beta (l,4)-N-acetylglucosaminyltransferase III (GnT III), such that GnT III adds GlcNAc to the antibody. Methods for producing antibodies in such a fashion are provided in WO/9954342 and WO/03011878. Cell lines can be altered to enhance or reduce or eliminate certain post- translational modifications, such as glycosylation, using genome editing technology such as Clustered Regularly Interspaced Short Palindromic Repeats (CRISPR). For example, CRISPR technology can be used to eliminate genes encoding glycosylating enzymes in 293 or CHO cells used to express monoclonal antibodies.
[00137] It is possible to engineer the antibody variable gene sequences obtained from human B cells to enhance their manufacturability and safety. Potential protein sequence liabilities can be identified by searching for sequence motifs associated with sites containing:
1) Unpaired Cys residues,
2) N-linked glycosylation,
3) Asn deamidation,
4) Asp isomerization,
5) SYE truncation,
6) Met oxidation,
7) Trp oxidation,
8) N-terminal glutamate,
9) Integrin binding,
10) CD llc/CD 18 binding, or
11) Fragmentation
Such motifs can be eliminated by altering the synthetic gene comprising the cDNA encoding the antibodies.
[00138] Antibodies can be engineered to enhance solubility. For example, some hydrophilic residues such as aspartic acid, glutamic acid, and serine contribute significantly more favorably to protein solubility than other hydrophilic residues, such as asparagine, glutamine, threonine, lysine, and arginine.
[00139] B cell repertoire deep sequencing of human B cells from blood donors has been performed on a wide scale. Sequence information about a significant portion of the human antibody repertoire facilitates statistical assessment of antibody sequence features common in healthy humans. With knowledge about the antibody sequence features in a human recombined antibody variable gene reference database, the position specific degree of “Human Likeness” (HL) of an antibody sequence can be estimated. HL has been shown to be useful for the development of antibodies in clinical use, like therapeutic antibodies or antibodies as vaccines. The goal is to increase the human likeness of antibodies to reduce potential adverse effects and anti-antibody immune responses that will lead to significantly decreased efficacy of the antibody drug or can induce serious health implications. One can assess antibody characteristics of the combined antibody repertoire of three healthy human blood donors of about 400 million sequences in total and created a novel “relative Human Likeness” (rHL) score that focuses on the hypervariable region of the antibody. The rHL score allows one to easily distinguish between human (positive score) and non-human sequences (negative score). Antibodies can be engineered to eliminate residues that are not common in human repertoires.
J. Characterization of Antibodies
[00140] Antibodies according to the present disclosure may be defined, in the first instance, by their binding specificity. Those of skill in the art, by assessing the binding specificity/affinity of a given antibody using techniques well known to those of skill in the art, can determine whether such antibodies fall within the scope of the instant claims. For example, the epitope to which a given antibody binds may consist of a single contiguous sequence of 3 or more (e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8. 9. 10, 11. 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20) amino acids located within the antigen molecule (e.g., a linear epitope in a domain). Alternatively, the epitope may consist of a plurality of non-contiguous amino acids (or amino acid sequences) located within the antigen molecule (e.g., a conformational epitope).
[00141] Various techniques known to persons of ordinary skill in the art can be used to determine whether an antibody “interacts with one or more amino acids” within a polypeptide or protein. Exemplary techniques include, for example, routine cross-blocking assays, such as that described in Antibodies, Harlow and Lane (Cold Spring Harbor Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.). Cross-blocking can be measured in various binding assays such as ELISA, biolayer interferometry, or surface plasmon resonance. Other methods include alanine scanning mutational analysis, peptide blot analysis (Reineke (2004) Methods Mol. Biol. 248: 443-63), peptide cleavage analysis, high-resolution electron microscopy techniques using single particle reconstruction, cryoEM, or tomography, crystallographic studies and NMR analysis. In addition, methods such as epitope excision, epitope extraction and chemical modification of antigens can be employed (Tomer (2000) Prot. Sci. 9: 487-496). Another method that can be used to identify the amino acids within a polypeptide with which an antibody interacts is hydrogen/deu terium exchange detected by mass spectrometry. In general terms, the hydrogen/deuterium exchange method involves deuterium-labeling the protein of interest, followed by binding the antibody to the deuterium-labeled protein. Next, the protein/antibody complex is transferred to water and exchangeable protons within amino acids that are protected by the antibody complex undergo deuterium-to-hydrogen back- exchange at a slower rate than exchangeable protons within amino acids that are not part of the interface. As a result, amino acids that form part of the protein/antibody interface may retain deuterium and therefore exhibit relatively higher mass compared to amino acids not included in the interface. After dissociation of the antibody, the target protein is subjected to protease cleavage and mass spectrometry analysis, thereby revealing the deuterium-labeled residues which correspond to the specific amino acids with which the antibody interacts. See, e.g., Ehring (1999) Analytical Biochemistry 267: 252-259; Engen and Smith (2001) Anal. Chem. 73: 256A-265A.
[00142] The term “epitope” refers to a site on an antigen to which B and/or T cells respond. B-cell epitopes can be formed both from contiguous amino acids or noncontiguous amino acids juxtaposed by tertiary folding of a protein. Epitopes formed from contiguous amino acids are typically retained on exposure to denaturing solvents, whereas epitopes formed by tertiary folding are typically lost on treatment with denaturing solvents. An epitope typically includes at least 3, and more usually, at least 5 or 8-10 amino acids in a unique spatial conformation.
[00143] Modification-Assisted Profiling (MAP), also known as Antigen Structure-based Antibody Profiling (ASAP) is a method that categorizes large numbers of monoclonal antibodies directed against the same antigen according to the similarities of the binding profile of each antibody to chemically or enzymatically modified antigen surfaces (see US 2004/0101920, herein specifically incorporated by reference in its entirety). Each category may reflect a unique epitope either distinctly different from or partially overlapping with epitope represented by another category. This technology allows rapid filtering of genetically identical antibodies, such that characterization can be focused on genetically distinct antibodies. When applied to hybridoma screening, MAP may facilitate identification of rare hybridoma clones that produce monoclonal antibodies having the desired characteristics. MAP may be used to sort the antibodies of the disclosure into groups of antibodies binding different epitopes.
[00144] The present disclosure includes antibodies that may bind to the same epitope, or a portion of the same epitope. One can easily determine whether an antibody binds to the same epitope as, or competes for binding with, a reference antibody by using routine methods known in the art. For example, to determine if a test antibody binds to the same epitope as a reference antibody, the reference antibody is allowed to bind to the target molecule under saturating conditions. Next, the ability of a test antibody to bind to the target molecule is assessed. If the test antibody is able to bind to the target molecule following saturation binding with the reference antibody, it can be concluded that the test antibody binds to a different epitope than the reference antibody. On the other hand, if the test antibody is not able to bind to the target molecule following saturation binding with the reference antibody, then the test antibody may bind to the same epitope as the epitope bound by the reference antibody.
[00145] To determine if a test antibody competes for binding with a disclosed antibody, the above-described binding methodology is performed in two orientations: In a first orientation, the disclosed antibody is allowed to bind to an SARS-CoV-2 spike protein under saturating conditions followed by assessment of binding of the test antibody to the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein. In a second orientation, the test antibody is allowed to bind to a SARS-CoV-2 spike protein under saturating conditions followed by assessment of binding of the disclosed antibody to the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein. If, in both orientations, only the first (saturating) antibody is capable of binding to the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein, then it is concluded that the test antibody and the disclosed antibody compete for binding to the S ARS- CoV-2 spike protein. As will be appreciated by a person of ordinary skill in the art, a test antibody that competes for binding with a disclosed antibody may not necessarily bind to the identical epitope as the disclosed antibody, but may sterically block binding of the disclosed antibody by binding an overlapping or adjacent epitope.
[00146] Two antibodies bind to the same or overlapping epitope if each competitively inhibits (blocks) binding of the other to the antigen. That is, a 1-, 5-, 10-, 20- or 100-fold excess of one antibody inhibits binding of the other by at least 50% but preferably 75%, 90%, or even 99% as measured in a competitive binding assay (see, e.g., Junghans et al., Cancer Res. 1990 50:1495-1502). Alternatively, two antibodies have the same epitope if essentially all amino acid mutations in the antigen that reduce or eliminate binding of one antibody reduce or eliminate binding of the other. Two antibodies have overlapping epitopes if some amino acid mutations that reduce or eliminate binding of one antibody reduce or eliminate binding of the other.
[00147] Additional routine experimentation (e.g., peptide mutation and binding analyses) can then be carried out to confirm whether the observed lack of binding of the test antibody is in fact due to binding to the same epitope as the reference antibody or if steric blocking (or another phenomenon) is responsible for the lack of observed binding. Experiments of this sort can be performed using ELISA, RIA, surface plasmon resonance, flow cytometry or any other quantitative or qualitative antibody-binding assay available in the art.
[00148] In another aspect, the antibodies may be defined by their variable sequence, which include additional “framework” regions. These are provided in Table 3 that represent full variable regions. Furthermore, the antibodies sequences may vary from these sequences, optionally using methods discussed in greater detail below. For example, nucleic acid sequences may vary from those set out above in that (a) the variable regions may be segregated away from the constant domains of the light and heavy chains, (b) the nucleic acids may vary from those set out above while not affecting the residues encoded thereby, (c) the nucleic acids may vary from those set out above by a given percentage, e.g., 10%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% homology, (d) the nucleic acids may vary from those set out above by virtue of the ability to hybridize under high stringency conditions, as exemplified by low salt and/or high temperature conditions, such as provided by about 0.02 M to about 0.15 M NaCl at temperatures of about 50°C to about 70°C, (e) the amino acids may vary from those set out above by a given percentage, e.g., 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% homology, or (f) the amino acids may vary from those set out above by permitting conservative substitutions. Each of the foregoing applies to the amino acid sequences of Table 2.
[00149] When comparing polynucleotide and polypeptide sequences, two sequences are said to be “identical” if the sequence of nucleotides or amino acids in the two sequences is the same when aligned for maximum correspondence, as described below. Comparisons between two sequences are typically performed by comparing the sequences over a comparison window to identify and compare local regions of sequence similarity. A “comparison window” as used herein, refers to a segment of at least about 20 contiguous positions, usually 30 to about 75, 40 to about 50, in which a sequence may be compared to a reference sequence of the same number of contiguous positions after the two sequences are optimally aligned.
[00150] Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison may be conducted using the Megalign program in the Lasergene suite of bioinformatics software (DNASTAR, Inc., Madison, Wis.), using default parameters. Alternatively, optimal alignment of sequences for comparison may be conducted by the local identity algorithm of Smith and Waterman (1981) Add. APL. Math 2:482, by the identity alignment algorithm of Needleman and Wunsch (1970) J. Mol. Biol. 48:443, by the search for similarity methods of Pearson and Lipman (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85: 2444, by computerized implementations of these algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, BLAST, FASTA, and TFASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package, Genetics Computer Group (GCG), 575 Science Dr., Madison, Wis.), or by inspection.
[00151] One particular example of algorithms that are suitable for determining percent sequence identity and sequence similarity are the BLAST and BLAST 2.0 algorithms, which are described in Altschul et al. (1977) Nucl. Acids Res. 25:3389-3402 and Altschul et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410, respectively. BLAST and BLAST 2.0 can be used, for example with the parameters described herein, to determine percent sequence identity for the polynucleotides and polypeptides of the disclosure. Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information. The rearranged nature of an antibody sequence and the variable length of each gene requires multiple rounds of BLAST searches for a single antibody sequence. Also, manual assembly of different genes is difficult and error-prone. The sequence analysis tool IgBLAST (world- wide-web at ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/igblast/) identifies matches to the germline V, D and J genes, details at rearrangement junctions, the delineation of Ig V domain framework regions and complementarity determining regions. IgBLAST can analyze nucleotide or protein sequences and can process sequences in batches and allows searches against the germline gene databases and other sequence databases simultaneously to minimize the chance of missing possibly the best matching germline V gene.
[00152] By “germline nucleic acid residue” is meant the nucleic acid residue that naturally occurs in a germline gene encoding a constant or variable region. “Germline gene” is the DNA found in a germ cell (z.e. , a cell destined to become an egg or in the sperm). A “germline mutation” refers to a heritable change in a particular DNA that has occurred in a germ cell or the zygote at the single-cell stage, and when transmitted to offspring, such a mutation is incorporated in every cell of the body. A germline mutation is in contrast to a somatic mutation which is acquired in a single body cell. In some cases, nucleotides in a germline DNA sequence encoding for a variable region are mutated (i.e., a somatic mutation) and replaced with a different nucleotide.
[00153] In one approach, the “percentage of sequence identity” is determined by comparing two optimally aligned sequences over a window of comparison of at least 20 positions, wherein the portion of the polynucleotide or polypeptide sequence in the comparison window may comprise additions or deletions (i.e., gaps) of 20 percent or less, usually 5 to 15 percent, or 10 to 12 percent, as compared to the reference sequences (which does not comprise additions or deletions) for optimal alignment of the two sequences. The percentage is calculated by determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid bases or amino acid residues occur in both sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the reference sequence (i.e. , the window size) and multiplying the results by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity.
[00154] Yet another way of defining an antibody is as a “derivative” of any of the antibodies provided herein and their antigen-binding fragments. A derivative antibody or antibody fragment may be modified by chemical modifications using techniques known to those of skill in the art, including, but not limited to, specific chemical cleavage, acetylation, formulation, metabolic synthesis of tunicamycin, etc. In one embodiment, an antibody derivative will possess a similar or identical function as the parental antibody. In another embodiment, an antibody derivative will exhibit an altered activity relative to the parental antibody. For example, a derivative antibody (or fragment thereof) can bind to its epitope more tightly or be more resistant to proteolysis than the parental antibody.
[00155] The term “derivative” refers to an antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof that immunospecifically binds to an antigen but which comprises, one, two, three, four, five or more amino acid substitutions, additions, deletions or modifications relative to a “parental” (or wild-type) molecule. Such amino acid substitutions or additions may introduce naturally occurring (i.e., DNA-encoded) or non- naturally occurring amino acid residues. The term “derivative” encompasses, for example, as variants having altered CHI, hinge, CH2, CH3 or CH4 regions, so as to form, for example antibodies, etc., having variant Fc regions that exhibit enhanced or impaired effector or binding characteristics. The term “derivative” additionally encompasses non-amino acid modifications, for example, amino acids that may be glycosylated (e.g., have altered mannose, 2-N-acetylglucosamine, galactose, fucose, glucose, sialic acid, 5-N-acetylneuraminic acid, 5 -glycolneuraminic acid, etc. content), acetylated, pegylated, phosphorylated, amidated, derivatized by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linked to a cellular ligand or other protein, etc. In some embodiments, the altered carbohydrate modifications modulate one or more of the following: solubilization of the antibody, facilitation of subcellular transport and secretion of the antibody, promotion of antibody assembly, conformational integrity, and antibody- mediated effector function. In a specific embodiment, the altered carbohydrate modifications enhance antibody mediated effector function relative to the antibody lacking the carbohydrate modification. Carbohydrate modifications that lead to altered antibody mediated effector function are well known in the art.
[00156] A derivative antibody or antibody fragment can be generated with an engineered sequence or glycosylation state to confer preferred levels of activity in antibody dependent cellular cytotoxicity (ADCC), antibody-dependent cellular phagocytosis (ADCP), antibody-dependent neutrophil phagocytosis (ADNP), or antibody-dependent complement deposition (ADCD) functions as measured by bead-based or cell-based assays or in vivo studies in animal models.
[00157] A derivative antibody or antibody fragment may be modified by chemical modifications using techniques known to those of skill in the art, including, but not limited to, specific chemical cleavage, acetylation, formulation, metabolic synthesis of tunicamycin, etc. In one embodiment, an antibody derivative will possess a similar or identical function as the parental antibody. In another embodiment, an antibody derivative will exhibit an altered activity relative to the parental antibody. For example, a derivative antibody (or fragment thereof) can bind to its epitope more tightly or be more resistant to proteolysis than the parental antibody.
[00158] One can determine the biophysical properties of antibodies. One can use elevated temperature to unfold antibodies to determine relative stability, using average apparent melting temperatures. Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC) measures the heat capacity, Cp, of a molecule (the heat required to warm it, per degree) as a function of temperature. One can use DSC to study the thermal stability of antibodies. DSC data for mAbs is particularly interesting because it sometimes resolves the unfolding of individual domains within the mAh structure, producing up to three peaks in the thermogram (from unfolding of the Fab, CH2, and CH3 domains). Typically unfolding of the Fab domain produces the strongest peak. The DSC profiles and relative stability of the Fc portion show characteristic differences for the human IgGi, IgG2, IgGa, and IgG4 subclasses (Garber and Demarest, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 355, 751-757, 2007). One also can determine average apparent melting temperature using circular dichroism (CD), performed with a CD spectrometer. Far-UV CD spectra will be measured for antibodies in the range of 200 to 260 nm at increments of 0.5 nm. The final spectra can be determined as averages of 20 accumulations. Residue ellipticity values can be calculated after background subtraction. Thermal unfolding of antibodies (0.1 mg/mL) can be monitored at 235 nm from 25-95 °C and a heating rate of 1 °C/min. One can use dynamic light scattering (DLS) to assess for propensity for aggregation. DLS is used to characterize size of various particles including proteins. If the system is not disperse in size, the mean effective diameter of the particles can be determined. This measurement depends on the size of the particle core, the size of surface structures, and particle concentration. Since DLS essentially measures fluctuations in scattered light intensity due to particles, the diffusion coefficient of the particles can be determined. DLS software in commercial DLA instruments displays the particle population at different diameters. Stability studies can be done conveniently using DLS. DLS measurements of a sample can show whether the particles aggregate over time or with temperature variation by determining whether the hydrodynamic radius of the particle increases. If particles aggregate, one can see a larger population of particles with a larger radius. Stability depending on temperature can be analyzed by controlling the temperature in situ. Capillary electrophoresis (CE) techniques include proven methodologies for determining features of antibody stability. One can use an iCE approach to resolve antibody protein charge variants due to deamidation, C-terminal lysines, sialylation, oxidation, glycosylation, and any other change to the protein that can result in a change in pl of the protein. Each of the expressed antibody proteins can be evaluated by high throughput, free solution isoelectric focusing (IEF) in a capillary column (cIEF), using a Protein Simple Maurice instrument. Whole-column UV absorption detection can be performed every 30 seconds for real time monitoring of molecules focusing at the isoelectric points (pls). This approach combines the high resolution of traditional gel IEF with the advantages of quantitation and automation found in column-based separations while eliminating the need for a mobilization step. The technique yields reproducible, quantitative analysis of identity, purity, and heterogeneity profiles for the expressed antibodies. The results identify charge heterogeneity and molecular sizing on the antibodies, with both absorbance and native fluorescence detection modes and with sensitivity of detection down to 0.7 pg/mL.
[00159] One can determine the intrinsic solubility score of antibody sequences. The intrinsic solubility scores can be calculated using CamSol Intrinsic (Sormanni et al., J Mol Biol 427, 478-490, 2015). The amino acid sequences for residues 95-102 (Kabat numbering) in HCDR3 of each antibody fragment such as a scFv can be evaluated via the online program to calculate the solubility scores. One also can determine solubility using laboratory techniques. Various techniques exist, including addition of lyophilized protein to a solution until the solution becomes saturated and the solubility limit is reached, or concentration by ultrafiltration in a microconcentrator with a suitable molecular weight cutoff. The most straightforward method is induction of amorphous precipitation, which measures protein solubility using a method involving protein precipitation using ammonium sulfate (Trevino et al., J Mol Biol, 366: 449-460, 2007). Ammonium sulfate precipitation gives quick and accurate information on relative solubility values. Ammonium sulfate precipitation produces precipitated solutions with well-defined aqueous and solid phases and requires relatively small amounts of protein. Solubility measurements performed using induction of amorphous precipitation by ammonium sulfate also can be done easily at different pH values. Protein solubility is highly pH dependent, and pH is considered the most important extrinsic factor that affects solubility.
[00160] Generally, it is thought that autoreactive clones should be eliminated during ontogeny by negative selection; however, it has become clear that many human naturally occurring antibodies with autoreactive properties persist in adult mature repertoires, and the autoreactivity may enhance the antiviral function of many antibodies to pathogens. It has been noted that HCDR3 loops in antibodies during early B cell development are often rich in positive charge and exhibit autoreactive patterns (Wardemann et al., Science 301, 1374-1377, 2003). One can test a given antibody for autoreactivity by assessing the level of binding to human origin cells in microscopy (using adherent HeLa or HEp-2 epithelial cells) and flow cytometric cell surface staining (using suspension Jurkat T cells and 293 S human embryonic kidney cells). Autoreactivity also can be surveyed using assessment of binding to tissues in tissue arrays.
III. Chimeric Antigen Receptors
[00161] Chimeric antigen receptor (CAR) molecules are recombinant fusion protein and are distinguished by their ability to both bind antigen and transduce activation signals via immunoreceptor activation motifs (ITAMs) present in their cytoplasmic tails in order to activate genetically modified immune effector cells for killing, proliferation, and cytokine production. Receptor constructs utilizing an antigen-binding moiety (for example, generated from single chain antibodies (scFv)) afford the additional advantage of being “universal” in that they bind native antigen on the target cell surface in an HLA-independent fashion.
[00162] Embodiments of the CARs described herein include nucleic acids encoding an antigen-specific CAR polypeptide comprising an intracellular signaling domain, a transmembrane domain, and an extracellular domain comprising an antigen-binding domain. A CAR may recognize an epitope comprised of the shared space between one or more antigens. Optionally, a CAR can comprise a hinge domain positioned between the transmembrane domain and the antigen binding domain. A CAR may further comprise a signal peptide that directs expression of the CAR to the cell surface. For example, a CAR may comprise a signal peptide from GM-CSF. A CAR may also be co-expressed with a membrane-bound cytokine to improve persistence. For example, a CAR may be co-expressed with membrane-bound IL- 15.
[00163] Depending on the arrangement of the domains of the CAR and the specific sequences used in the domains, immune effector cells expressing the CAR may have different levels activity against target cells. Different CAR sequences may be introduced into immune effector cells to generate engineered cells, the engineered cells selected for elevated SRC, and the selected cells tested for activity to identify the CAR constructs predicted to have the greatest therapeutic efficacy.
[00164] A chimeric antigen receptor can be produced by any means known in the art, though preferably it is produced using recombinant DNA techniques. A nucleic acid sequence encoding the several regions of the chimeric antigen receptor can be prepared and assembled into a complete coding sequence by standard techniques of molecular cloning (genomic library screening, PCR, primer-assisted ligation, scFv libraries from yeast and bacteria, site-directed mutagenesis, etc.). The resulting coding region can be inserted into an expression vector and used to transform a suitable expression host allogeneic or autologous immune effector cells, such as a T cell or an NK cell.
[00165] The chimeric construct may be introduced into immune effector cells as naked DNA or in a suitable vector. Methods of stably transfecting cells by electroporation using naked DNA are known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,410,319. Naked DNA generally refers to the DNA encoding a chimeric receptor contained in a plasmid expression vector in proper orientation for expression. Alternatively, a viral vector (e.g., a retroviral vector, adenoviral vector, adeno-associated viral vector, or lentiviral vector) can be used to introduce the chimeric construct into immune effector cells. Suitable vectors for use in accordance with the method of the present invention are non-replicating in the immune effector cells. A large number of vectors are known that are based on viruses, where the copy number of the virus maintained in the cell is low enough to maintain the viability of the cell, such as, for example, vectors based on HIV, SV40, EBV, HSV, or BPV.
A. Antigen binding domains
[00166] An antigen binding domain may comprise complementary determining regions of a monoclonal antibody, variable regions of a monoclonal antibody, and/or antigen binding fragments thereof. The antigen binding regions or domains may comprise a fragment of the VH and VL chains of a single-chain variable fragment (scFv) derived from a particular human monoclonal antibody. The fragment can also be any number of different antigen binding domains of an antigen- specific antibody. The fragment may be an antigen-specific scFv encoded by a sequence that is optimized for human codon usage for expression in human cells. In certain aspects, VH and VL domains of a CAR are separated by a linker sequence, such as a Whitlow linker.
[00167] The prototypical CAR encodes a scFv comprising VH and VL domains derived from one monoclonal antibody (mAb), coupled to a transmembrane domain and one or more cytoplasmic signaling domains (e.g. costimulatory domains and signaling domains). Thus, a CAR may comprise the LCDR1-3 sequences and the HCDR1-3 sequences of an antibody that binds to SARS-CoV-2 spike protein. In further aspects, however, two of more antibodies that bind to an antigen of interest are identified and a CAR is constructed that comprises: (1) the HCDRL3 sequences of a first antibody that binds to the antigen; and (2) the LCDR1-3 sequences of a second antibody that binds to the antigen. Such a CAR that comprises HCDR and LCDR sequences from two different antigen binding antibodies may have the advantage of preferential binding to particular conformations of an antigen (e.g., conformations preferentially associated with cancer cells versus normal tissue).
[00168] Alternatively, a CAR may be engineered using VH and VL chains derived from different mAbs to generate a panel of CAR+ immune effector cells. The antigen binding domain of a CAR may contain any combination of the LCDR1-3 sequences of a first antibody and the HCDR1-3 sequences of a second antibody.
B. Hinge domains
[00169] A CAR polypeptide may include a hinge domain positioned between the antigen binding domain and the transmembrane domain. In some cases, a hinge domain may be included in CAR polypeptides to provide adequate distance between the antigen binding domain and the cell surface or to alleviate possible steric hindrance that could adversely affect antigen binding or effector function of CAR-modified immune effector cells. The hinge domain may comprise a sequence that binds to an Fc receptor, such as FcyR2a or FcyRla. For example, the hinge sequence may comprise an Fc domain from a human immunoglobulin e.g., IgGl, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgAl, IgA2, IgM, IgD or IgE) that binds to an Fc receptor.
[00170] A CAR hinge domain may be derived from human immunoglobulin (Ig) constant region or a portion thereof including the Ig hinge, or from human CD8 a transmembrane domain and CD8a-hinge region. A CAR hinge domain may comprise a hinge-CH2-CH3 region of antibody isotype IgG4. The hinge domain (and/or the CAR) may not comprise a wild type human IgG4 CH2 and CH3 sequence. Point mutations may be introduced in antibody heavy chain CH2 domain to reduce glycosylation and non-specific Fc gamma receptor binding of CAR-modified immune effector cells.
[00171] A CAR hinge domain may comprise an Ig Fc domain that comprises at least one mutation relative to wild type Ig Fc domain that reduces Fc -receptor binding. For example, the CAR hinge domain can comprise an IgG4-Fc domain that comprises at least one mutation relative to wild type IgG4-Fc domain that reduces Fc-receptor binding. A CAR hinge domain may comprise an IgG4-Fc domain having a mutation (such as an amino acid deletion or substitution) at a position corresponding to L235 and/or N297 relative to the wild type IgG4-Fc sequence. For example, a CAR hinge domain can comprise an IgG4-Fc domain having a L235E and/or a N297Q mutation relative to the wild type IgG4-Fc sequence. A CAR hinge domain may comprise an IgG4-Fc domain having an amino acid substitution at position L235 for an amino acid that is hydrophilic, such as R, H, K, D, E, S, T, N or Q, or that has similar properties to an “E,” such as D. A CAR hinge domain may comprise an IgG4-Fc domain having an amino acid substitution at position N297 for an amino acid that has similar properties to a “Q,” such as S or T.
[00172] The hinge domain may comprise a sequence that is about 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100% identical to an IgG4 hinge domain, a CD8a hinge domain, a CD28 hinge domain, or an engineered hinge domain.
C. Transmembrane domains
[00173] The antigen- specific extracellular domain and the intracellular signaling-domain may be linked by a transmembrane domain. Polypeptide sequences that can be used as part of transmembrane domain include, without limitation, the human CD4 transmembrane domain, the human CD28 transmembrane domain, the transmembrane human CD3^ domain, a cysteine mutated human CD3 domain, or other transmembrane domains from other human transmembrane signaling proteins, such as CD16, CD8, and erythropoietin receptor. For example, the transmembrane domain may comprise a sequence at least 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100% identical to one of those provided in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2014/0274909 (e.g. a CD8 and/or a CD28 transmembrane domain) or U.S. Patent No. 8,906,682 (e.g. a CD8a transmembrane domain), both incorporated herein by reference. Transmembrane regions may be derived from (i.e. comprise at least the transmembrane region(s) of) the alpha, beta or zeta chain of the T-cell receptor, CD3 epsilon, CD45, CD4, CD5, CD8, CD9, CD16, CD22, CD33, CD37, CD64, CD80, CD86, CD134, CD137, CD154. In certain specific aspects, the transmembrane domain can be 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100% identical to a CD8a transmembrane domain or a CD28 transmembrane domain.
D. Intracellular signaling domains
[00174] The intracellular signaling domain of a CAR is responsible for activation of at least one of the normal effector functions of the immune cell engineered to express the CAR. The term “effector function” refers to a specialized function of a differentiated cell. Effector function of a T cell, for example, may be cytolytic activity or helper activity including the secretion of cytokines. Effector function in a naive, memory, or memory-type T cell includes antigen-dependent proliferation. Thus the term “intracellular signaling domain” refers to the portion of a protein that transduces the effector function signal and directs the cell to perform a specialized function. The intracellular signaling domain may be derived from the intracellular signaling domain of a native receptor. Examples of such native receptors include the zeta chain of the T-cell receptor or any of its homologs (e.g., eta, delta, gamma, or epsilon), MB1 chain, B29, Fc RIII, Fc RI, and combinations of signaling molecules, such as CD3^ and CD28, CD27, 4-1BB/CD137, ICOS/CD278, IL-2RP/CD122, IL-2Rot/CD132, DAP10, DAP12, CD40, OX40/CD134, and combinations thereof, as well as other similar molecules and fragments. Intracellular signaling portions of other members of the families of activating proteins can be used.
[00175] While the entire intracellular signaling domain may be employed, in many cases it will not be necessary to use the entire intracellular polypeptide. To the extent that a truncated portion of the intracellular signaling domain may find use, such truncated portion may be used in place of the intact chain as long as it still transduces the effector function signal. The term “intracellular signaling domain” is thus meant to include a truncated portion of the intracellular signaling domain sufficient to transduce the effector function signal, upon CAR binding to a target. One or multiple cytoplasmic domains may be employed, as so-called third generation CARs have at least two or three signaling domains fused together for additive or synergistic effect, for example the CD28 and 4-1BB can be combined in a CAR construct. In certain specific aspects, the intracellular signaling domain comprises a sequence 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or 100% identical to a CD3^ intracellular domain, a CD28 intracellular domain, a CD137 intracellular domain, or a domain comprising a CD28 intracellular domain fused to the 4-1BB intracellular domain.
E. Immune Effector Cells
[00176] Immune effectors cells may be T cells (e.g., regulatory T cells, CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, or gamma-delta T cells), natural killer (NK) cells, invariant NK cells, or NKT cells. Also provided herein are methods of producing and engineering the immune effector cells as well as methods of using and administering the cells for adoptive cell therapy, in which case the cells may be autologous or allogeneic. Thus, the immune effector cells may be used as immunotherapy, such as to target cancer cells.
[00177] The immune effector cells may be isolated from subjects, particularly human subjects. The immune effector cells can be obtained from a subject of interest, such as a subject suspected of having a particular disease or condition, a subject suspected of having a predisposition to a particular disease or condition, a subject who is undergoing therapy for a particular disease or condition, a subject who is a healthy volunteer or healthy donor, or from a blood bank. Immune effector cells can be collected, enriched, and/or purified from any tissue or organ in which they reside in the subject including, but not limited to, blood, cord blood, spleen, thymus, lymph nodes, bone marrow, tissues removed and/or exposed during surgical procedures, and tissues obtained via biopsy procedures. The isolated immune effector cells may be used directly, or they can be stored for a period of time, such as by freezing.
[00178] Tissues/organs from which the immune effector cells are enriched, isolated, and/or purified may be isolated from both living and non-living subjects, wherein the non-living subjects are organ donors. Immune effector cells isolated from cord blood may have enhanced immunomodulation capacity, such as measured by CD4- or CD8-positive T cell suppression. The immune effector cells may be isolated from pooled blood, particularly pooled cord blood, for enhanced immunomodulation capacity. The pooled blood may be from 2 or more sources, such as 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 , 8, 9, 10 or more sources (e.g., donor subjects).
[00179] The population of immune cells can be obtained from a subject in need of therapy or suffering from a disease associated with reduced immune effector cell activity. Thus, the cells will be autologous to the subject in need of therapy. Alternatively, the population of immune effector cells can be obtained from a donor, preferably an allogeneic donor. Allogeneic donor cells may or may not be human-leukocyte-antigen (HLA)- compatible. To be rendered subject-compatible, allogeneic cells can be treated to reduce immunogenicity.
1. T Cells
[00180] The immune effector cells may be T cells. The T cells may be derived from the blood, bone marrow, lymph, umbilical cord, or lymphoid organs. The T cells may be human T cells. The T cells typically are primary cells, such as those isolated directly from a subject and/or isolated from a subject and frozen. The cells may include one or more subsets of T cells or other cell types, such as whole T cell populations, CD4+ cells, CD8+ cells, and subpopulations thereof, such as those defined by function, activation state, maturity, potential for differentiation, expansion, recirculation, localization, persistence capacities, antigenspecificity, type of antigen receptor, presence in a particular organ or compartment, marker or cytokine secretion profile, and/or degree of differentiation. With reference to the subject to be treated, the cells may be allogeneic and/or autologous. For off-the-shelf technologies, the cells may be derived from pluripotent and/or multipotent cells, such as stem cells, such as induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs).
[00181] Among the sub-types and subpopulations of T cells (e.g., CD4+ and/or CD8+ T cells) are naive T (TN) cells, effector T cells (TEFF), memory T cells and sub-types thereof, such as stem cell memory T (TSCM), central memory T (TCM), effector memory T (TEM), or terminally differentiated effector memory T cells, tumor-infiltrating lymphocytes (TIL), immature T cells, mature T cells, helper T cells, cytotoxic T cells, mucosa-associated invariant T (MAIT) cells, naturally occurring and adaptive regulatory T (Treg) cells, helper T cells, such as TH1 cells, TH2 cells, TH3 cells, TH17 cells, TH9 cells, TH22 cells, follicular helper T cells, alpha/beta T cells, and delta/gamma T cells.
[00182] One or more of the T cell populations may be enriched for or depleted of cells that are positive for a specific marker, such as surface markers, or that are negative for a specific marker. In some cases, such markers are those that are absent or expressed at relatively low levels on certain populations of T cells (e.g., non-memory cells) but are present or expressed at relatively higher levels on certain other populations of T cells (e.g., memory cells).
[00183] T cells may be separated from a PBMC sample by negative selection of markers expressed on non-T cells, such as B cells, monocytes, or other white blood cells, such as CD14. In some aspects, a CD4+ or CD8+ selection step is used to separate CD4+ helper and CD8+ cytotoxic T cells. Such CD4+ and CD8+ populations can be further sorted into sub-populations by positive or negative selection for markers expressed or expressed to a relatively higher degree on one or more naive, memory, and/or effector T cell subpopulations.
[00184] CD8+ T cells may be further enriched for or depleted of naive, central memory, effector memory, and/or central memory stem cells, such as by positive or negative selection based on surface antigens associated with the respective subpopulation. Enrichment for central memory T (TCM) cells may be carried out to increase efficacy, such as to improve long-term survival, expansion, and/or engraftment following administration, which in some aspects is particularly robust in such sub-populations.
[00185] The T cells may be autologous T cells. In this method, tumor samples are obtained from patients and a single cell suspension is obtained. The single cell suspension can be obtained in any suitable manner, e.g., mechanically (disaggregating the tumor using, e.g., a gentleMACS™ Dissociator, Miltenyi Biotec, Auburn, Calif.) or enzymatically (e.g., collagenase or DNase). Single-cell suspensions of tumor enzymatic digests are cultured in interleukin-2 (IL-2). The cells are cultured until confluence (e.g., about 2xl06 lymphocytes), e.g., from about 5 to about 21 days, preferably from about 10 to about 14 days.
[00186] The cultured T cells can be pooled and rapidly expanded. Rapid expansion provides an increase in the number of antigen-specific T cells of at least about 50- fold (e.g., 50-, 60-, 70-, 80-, 90-, or 100-fold, or greater) over a period of about 10 to about 14 days. More preferably, rapid expansion provides an increase of at least about 200-fold (e.g., 200-, 300-, 400-, 500-, 600-, 700-, 800-, 900-, or greater) over a period of about 10 to about 14 days.
[00187] Expansion can be accomplished by any of a number of methods as are known in the art. For example, T cells can be rapidly expanded using non-specific T-cell receptor stimulation in the presence of feeder lymphocytes and either interleukin-2 (IL-2) or interleukin- 15 (IL- 15), with IL-2 being preferred. The non-specific T-cell receptor stimulus can include around 30 ng/ml of OKT3, a mouse monoclonal anti-CD3 antibody (available from Ortho-McNeil®, Raritan, N.J.). Alternatively, T cells can be rapidly expanded by stimulation of peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC) in vitro with one or more antigens (including antigenic portions thereof, such as epitope(s), or a cell) of the cancer, which can be optionally expressed from a vector, such as a human leukocyte antigen A2 (HLA-A2) binding peptide, in the presence of a T-cell growth factor, such as 300 lU/ml IL-2 or IL-15, with IL-2 being preferred. The in vz/ro-induced T-cells are rapidly expanded by re- stimulation with the same antigen(s) of the cancer pulsed onto HLA-A2-expressing antigen-presenting cells. Alternatively, the T-cells can be re-stimulated with irradiated, autologous lymphocytes or with irradiated HLA-A2+ allogeneic lymphocytes and IL-2, for example. [00188] The autologous T-cells can be modified to express a T-cell growth factor that promotes the growth and activation of the autologous T-cells. Suitable T-cell growth factors include, for example, interleukin (IL)-2, IL-7, IL-15, and IL-12. Suitable methods of modification are known in the art. See, for instance, Sambrook et al., MOLECULAR CLONING: A LABORATORY MANUAL, 3rd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y. 2001; and Ausubel et al., CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, Greene Publishing Associates and John Wiley & Sons, NY, 1994. In particular aspects, modified autologous T-cells express the T-cell growth factor at high levels. T-cell growth factor coding sequences, such as that of IL- 12, are readily available in the art, as are promoters, the operable linkage of which to a T-cell growth factor coding sequence promote high-level expression.
2. NK Cells
[00189] The immune effector cells may be natural killer (NK) cells. Natural killer (NK) cells are a subpopulation of lymphocytes that have spontaneous cytotoxicity against a variety of tumor cells, virus-infected cells, and some normal cells in the bone marrow and thymus. NK cells are critical effectors of the early innate immune response toward transformed and virus-infected cells. NK cells constitute about 10% of the lymphocytes in human peripheral blood. When lymphocytes are cultured in the presence of interleukin 2 (IL- 2), strong cytotoxic reactivity develops. NK cells are effector cells known as large granular lymphocytes because of their larger size and the presence of characteristic azurophilic granules in their cytoplasm. NK cells differentiate and mature in the bone marrow, lymph nodes, spleen, tonsils, and thymus. NK cells can be detected by specific surface markers, such as CD16, CD56, and CD8 in humans. NK cells do not express T-cell antigen receptors, the pan T marker CD3, or surface immunoglobulin B cell receptors.
[00190] Stimulation of NK cells is achieved through a cross-talk of signals derived from cell surface activating and inhibitory receptors. The activation status of NK cells is regulated by a balance of intracellular signals received from an array of germ-line- encoded activating and inhibitory receptors. When NK cells encounter an abnormal cell (e.g., tumor or virus -infected cell) and activating signals predominate, the NK cells can rapidly induce apoptosis of the target cell through directed secretion of cytolytic granules containing perforin and granzymes or engagement of death domain-containing receptors. Activated NK cells can also secrete type I cytokines, such as interferon-y, tumor necrosis factor-a and granulocyte-macrophage colony- stimulating factor (GM-CSF), which activate both innate and adaptive immune cells as well as other cytokines and. Production of these soluble factors by NK cells in early innate immune responses significantly influences the recruitment and function of other hematopoietic cells. Also, through physical contacts and production of cytokines, NK cells are central players in a regulatory crosstalk network with dendritic cells and neutrophils to promote or restrain immune responses.
[00191] NK cells may be derived from human peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC), unstimulated leukapheresis products (PBSC), human embryonic stem cells (hESCs), induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs), bone marrow, or umbilical cord blood by methods well known in the art. In certain aspects, the NK cells are isolated and expanded ex vivo. For example, CB mononuclear cells may be isolated by ficoll density gradient centrifugation and cultured in a bioreactor with IL-2 and artificial antigen presenting cells (aAPCs). After 7 days, the cell culture may be depleted of any cells expressing CD3 and recultured for an additional 7 days. The cells may be again CD3 -depleted and characterized to determine the percentage of CD56+/CD3‘ cells or NK cells. In other methods, umbilical CB may be used to derive NK cells by the isolation of CD34+ cells and differentiation into CD56VCD3’ cells by culturing in medium contain SCF, IL-7, IL-15, and IL-2.
F. Engineering of Immune Effector Cells
[00192] The immune effectors cells (e.g., autologous or allogeneic T cells (e.g., regulatory T cells, CD4+ T cells, CD8+ T cells, or gamma-delta T cells), NK cells, invariant NK cells, or NKT cells) may be genetically engineered to express antigen receptors such as chimeric antigen receptors (CARs). For example, the host cells (e.g, autologous or allogeneic T-cells) may be modified to express a CAR having antigenic specificity for SARS-CoV-2 spike protein. In particular embodiments, NK cells are engineered to express a CAR. Multiple CARs, such as to different antigens, may be added to a single cell type, such as T cells or NK cells.
[00193] The cells may comprise one or more nucleic acids introduced via genetic engineering that encode one or more antigen receptors, and genetically engineered products of such nucleic acids. The nucleic acids may be heterologous, i.e., normally not present in a cell or sample obtained from the cell, such as one obtained from another organism or cell, which for example, is not ordinarily found in the cell being engineered and/or an organism from which such cell is derived. The nucleic acids may not be naturally occurring, such as a nucleic acid not found in nature (e.g., chimeric).
IV. Pharmaceutical Formulations
[00194] The present disclosure provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising antibodies that selectively target SARS-CoV-2 spike protein. Such compositions comprise a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of an antibody or a fragment thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Also provided herein are pharmaceutical compositions and formulations comprising immune cells (e.g., T cells or NK cells) expressing a CAR and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
[00195] The phrases “pharmaceutical or pharmacologically acceptable” refers to molecular entities and compositions that do not produce an adverse, allergic, or other untoward reaction when administered to an animal, such as a human, as appropriate. The preparation of a pharmaceutical composition comprising an antibody or additional active ingredient will be known to those of skill in the art in light of the present disclosure. Moreover, for animal (e.g., human) administration, it will be understood that preparations should meet sterility, pyrogenicity, general safety, and purity standards as required by FDA Office of Biological Standards.
[00196] As used herein, “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” includes any and all aqueous solvents (e.g., water, alcoholic/aqueous solutions, saline solutions, parenteral vehicles, such as sodium chloride, Ringer’s dextrose, etc.), non-aqueous solvents (e.g., propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, vegetable oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyloleate), dispersion media, coatings, surfactants, antioxidants, preservatives (e.g., antibacterial or antifungal agents, anti-oxidants, chelating agents, and inert gases), isotonic agents, absorption delaying agents, salts, drugs, drug stabilizers, gels, binders, excipients, disintegration agents, lubricants, sweetening agents, flavoring agents, dyes, fluid and nutrient replenishers, such like materials and combinations thereof, as would be known to one of ordinary skill in the art. Water is a particular carrier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions. The pH and exact concentration of the various components in a pharmaceutical composition are adjusted according to well-known parameters. [00197] The active ingredients can be formulated for parenteral administration, e.g., formulated for injection via the intravenous, intramuscular, sub-cutaneous, or even intraperitoneal routes. Typically, such compositions can be prepared as either liquid solutions or suspensions; solid forms suitable for use to prepare solutions or suspensions upon the addition of a liquid prior to injection can also be prepared; and, the preparations can also be emulsified.
[00198] The therapeutic compositions of the present embodiments are advantageously administered in the form of injectable compositions either as liquid solutions or suspensions; solid forms suitable for solution in, or suspension in, liquid prior to injection may also be prepared. These preparations also may be emulsified.
[00199] The pharmaceutical forms suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions; formulations including sesame oil, peanut oil, or aqueous propylene glycol; and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions. In all cases the form must be sterile and must be fluid to the extent that it may be easily injected. It also should be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms, such as bacteria and fungi.
[00200] The proteinaceous compositions may be formulated into a neutral or salt form. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts, include the acid addition salts (formed with the free amino groups of the protein) and which are formed with inorganic acids such as, for example, hydrochloric or phosphoric acids, or such organic acids as acetic, oxalic, tartaric, mandelic, and the like. Salts formed with the free carboxyl groups can also be derived from inorganic bases such as, for example, sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, or ferric hydroxides, and such organic bases as isopropylamine, trimethylamine, histidine, procaine and the like.
[00201] A pharmaceutical composition can include a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), suitable mixtures thereof, and vegetable oils. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion, and by the use of surfactants. The prevention of the action of microorganisms can be brought about by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars or sodium chloride. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by the use in the compositions of agents delaying absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
[00202] The composition, if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents. These compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like. Oral formulations can include standard carriers such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc. Examples of suitable pharmaceutical agents are described in Remington’s Pharmaceutical Sciences. Such compositions will contain a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of the antibody or fragment thereof, preferably in purified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient.
[00203] Passive transfer of antibodies generally will involve the use of intravenous or intramuscular injections. The forms of antibody can be as monoclonal antibodies. Such immunity generally lasts for only a short period of time, and there is also a potential risk for hypersensitivity reactions, and serum sickness, especially from gamma globulin of non-human origin. The antibodies will be formulated in a carrier suitable for injection, i.e., sterile and syringeable.
[00204] Generally, the ingredients of compositions of the disclosure are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water-free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent. Where the composition is to be administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline. Where the composition is administered by injection, an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration.
[00205] In certain embodiments, pharmaceutical compositions may comprise, for example, at least about 0.1% of an active ingredient. In other embodiments, an active ingredient may comprise between about 2% to about 75% of the weight of the unit, or between about 25% to about 60%, for example, and any range derivable therein.
[00206] The term “unit dose” or “dosage” refers to physically discrete units suitable for use in a subject, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of the therapeutic composition calculated to produce the desired responses discussed above in association with its administration, i.e., the appropriate route and treatment regimen. The quantity to be administered, both according to number of treatments and unit dose, depends on the effect desired. The actual dosage amount of a composition of the present embodiments administered to a patient or subject can be determined by physical and physiological factors, such as body weight, the age, health, and sex of the subject, the type of disease being treated, the extent of disease penetration, previous or concurrent therapeutic interventions, idiopathy of the patient, the route of administration, and the potency, stability, and toxicity of the particular therapeutic substance. For example, a dose may also comprise from about 1 pg/kg/body weight to about 1000 mg/kg/body weight (this such range includes intervening doses) or more per administration, and any range derivable therein. In non-limiting examples of a derivable range from the numbers listed herein, a range of about 5 pg/kg/body weight to about 100 mg/kg/body weight, about 5 pg/kg/body weight to about 500 mg/kg/body weight, etc. , can be administered. The practitioner responsible for administration will, in any event, determine the concentration of active ingredient(s) in a composition and appropriate dose(s) for the individual subject.
V. Methods of Treatment
[00207] Certain aspects of the present embodiments can be used to prevent or treat a disease or disorder associated with a coronavirus infection, such as a SARS-CoV-2 infection or COVID- 19. In certain embodiments, the compositions and methods of the present embodiments involve administering an antibody or an antibody fragment against SARS-CoV-2 spike protein, optionally in combination with a second or additional therapy.
[00208] “Treatment” and “treating” refer to administration or application of a therapeutic agent to a subject or performance of a procedure or modality on a subject for the purpose of obtaining a therapeutic benefit of a disease or health-related condition. For example, a treatment may include administration of a pharmaceutically effective amount of at least one antibody that targets SARS-CoV-2 spike protein, either alone or in combination with other therapies.
[00209] The term “subject” as used herein refers to any individual or patient to which the subject methods are performed. Generally, the subject is human, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, the subject may be an animal. Thus, other animals, including mammals, such as rodents (including mice, rats, hamsters, and guinea pigs), cats, dogs, rabbits, farm animals (including cows, horses, goats, sheep, pigs, etc.), and primates (including monkeys, chimpanzees, orangutans, and gorillas) are included within the definition of subject.
[00210] The term “therapeutic benefit” or “therapeutically effective” as used throughout this application refers to anything that promotes or enhances the well-being of the subject with respect to the medical treatment of this condition. This includes, but is not limited to, a reduction in the frequency or severity of the signs or symptoms of a disease. For example, treatment of a SARS-CoV-2 infection may involve, for example, a reduction in viral load. Treatment of SARS-CoV-2 may also refer to increasing the likely hood of survival of a subject with COVID- 19.
[00211] In addition to being used as a monotherapy, the antibodies of the present invention may also find use in combination therapies. Effective combination therapy may be achieved with a single composition or pharmacological formulation that includes both agents, or with two distinct compositions or formulations, administered at the same time, wherein one composition includes at least one antibody of this invention, and the other includes the second agent(s). Alternatively, the antibody therapy may precede or follow the other agent treatment by intervals ranging from minutes to months.
[00212] Various combinations may be employed, such as when an antibody of the present invention is “A” and “B” represents a secondary agent, non-limiting examples of which are described below:
A/B/A B/A/B B/B/A A/A/B A/B/B B/A/A A/B/B/B B/A/B/B
B/B/B/A B/B/A/B A/A/B/B A/B/A/B A/B/B/A B/B/A/A
B/A/B/A B/A/A/B A/A/A/B B/A/A/A A/B/A/A A/A/B/A [00213] It is contemplated that other therapeutic agents may be used in conjunction with the treatments of the current invention. In some embodiments, the present invention contemplates the use of one or more other therapies for the treatment of COVID-19 include the use of a SARS-CoV-2 protease inhibitor, anti-platelet drugs, an anti-coagulation agent, a human type I interferon, a corticosteroid, or remdesivir.
[00214] In some embodiments, the anti-platelet drug is aspirin, an ADP receptor antagonist (e.g., ticlopidine, clopidogrel, cangrelor, prasugrel, ticagrelor, thienopyridine), or a glycoprotein Ilb/IIIa receptor inhibitor (e.g., abciximab, eptifibatide, ticofiban). In some embodiment, the anti-coagulation agent is rivaroxaban, apixaban, dipyridamole, cilostazol, atromentin, edoxaban, fondaprinux, betrixaban, letaxaban, eribaxaban, hirudin, a thrombin inhibitor (e.g., lepirudin, desirudin, dabigatran, bivalirudin, ximelagatran), argatroban, batroxobin, hementin, low molecular weight heparin, unfractionated heparin, vitamin E, or a vitamin K antagonist (e.g., warfarin (Coumadin), acenocoumarol, phenprocoumon, phenindione).
[00215] Human type I interferons (IFNs) are a large subgroup of interferon proteins that help regulate the activity of the immune system. The mammalian types are designated IFN-a (alpha), IFN-P (beta), IFN-K (kappa), IFN-8 (delta), IFN-s (epsilon), IFN-r (tau), IFN-(0 (omega), and IFN-^ (zeta, also known as limitin). Type I interferons have shown efficacy against the replication of various viruses, included Zika virus, chikungunya virus, flaviviruses, and hepatitis C virus. “Interferon compounds” include interferon- alpha, interferon-alpha analogues, interferon- alpha derivatives, interferon- alpha conjugates, interferon beta, interferon-beta analogues, interferon-beta derivatives, interferon-beta conjugates and mixtures thereof. The whole protein or its fragments can be fused with other peptides and proteins such as immunoglobulins and other cytokines. Interferon-alpha and interferon-beta conjugates may represent, for example, a composition comprising interferon- beta coupled to a non-naturally occurring polymer comprising a polyalkylene glycol moiety. Preferred interferon compounds include Roferon®, Intron®, Alferon®, Infergen®, Omniferon®, Alfacon-1, interferon-alpha, interferon-alpha analogues, pegylated interferon- alpha, polymerized interferon-alpha, dimerized interferon-alpha, interferon-alpha conjugated to carriers, interferon-alpha as oral inhalant, interferon-alpha as injectable compositions, interferon-alpha as a topical composition, Roferon® analogues, Intron® analogues, Alferon® analogues, and Infergen® analogues, Omniferon® analogues, Alfacon-1 analogues, interferon beta, Avonex™, Betaseron™, Betaferon™, Rebif™, interferon-beta analogues, pegylated interferon-beta, polymerized interferon-beta, dimerized interferon-beta, interferonbeta conjugated to carriers, interferon-beta as oral inhalant, interferon-beta as an injectable composition, interferon-beta as a topical composition, Avonex™analogues, Betaseron™, Betaferon™ analogues, and Rebif™ analogues. Alternatively, agents that induce interferonalpha or interferon-beta production or mimic the action of interferon-alpha or interferon-beta may also be employed. Interferon inducers include tilorone, poly(I)-poly(C), imiquimod, cridanimod, bropirimine.
[00216] It is contemplated that other agents may be used in combination with certain aspects of the present invention to improve the therapeutic efficacy of treatment. These additional agents include anti-virals, corticosteroids (e.g., dexamethasone), chloroquine, hydroxychloroquine, remdesivir, favipiravir, lopinavir, and ritonavir.
VI. Methods of Detection
[00217] In some aspects, the present disclosure concerns immunodetection methods for detecting the presence of SARS-CoV-2 spike protein. A wide variety of assay formats are contemplated for detecting protein products, including immunohistochemistry, enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), immunoradiometric assay, fluoroimmunoassay, chemiluminescent assay, bioluminescent assay, dot blotting, FACS analyses, and Western blot to mention a few. The steps of various useful immunodetection methods have been described in the scientific literature. In general, the immunobinding methods include obtaining a sample, and contacting the sample with an antibody specific for the protein to be detected, as the case may be, under conditions effective to allow the formation of immunocomplexes. In general, the detection of immunocomplex formation is well known in the art and may be achieved through the application of numerous approaches. These methods are generally based upon the detection of a label or marker, such as any of those radioactive, fluorescent, biological and enzymatic tags. Of course, one may find additional advantages through the use of a secondary binding ligand such as a second antibody and/or a biotin/avidin ligand binding arrangement, as is known in the art.
[00218] The antibody employed in the detection may itself be linked to a detectable label, wherein one would then simply detect this label, thereby allowing the amount of the primary immune complexes in the composition to be determined. Alternatively, the first antibody that becomes bound within the primary immune complexes may be detected by means of a second binding ligand that has binding affinity for the antibody. In these cases, the second binding ligand may be linked to a detectable label. The second binding ligand is itself often an antibody, which may thus be termed a “secondary” antibody. The primary immune complexes are contacted with the labeled, secondary binding ligand, or antibody, under effective conditions and for a period of time sufficient to allow the formation of secondary immune complexes. The secondary immune complexes are then generally washed to remove any non-specifically bound labeled secondary antibodies or ligands, and the remaining label in the secondary immune complexes is then detected.
[00219] As used herein, the term “sample” refers to any sample suitable for the detection methods provided by the present invention. The sample may be any sample that includes material suitable for detection or isolation. Sources of samples include blood, pleural fluid, peritoneal fluid, urine, saliva, malignant ascites, broncho-alveolar lavage fluid, synovial fluid, and bronchial washes. In one aspect, the sample is a blood sample, including, for example, whole blood or any fraction or component thereof. A blood sample suitable for use with the present invention may be extracted from any source known that includes blood cells or components thereof, such as venous, arterial, peripheral, tissue, cord, and the like. For example, a sample may be obtained and processed using well-known and routine clinical methods (e.g., procedures for drawing and processing whole blood). In one aspect, an exemplary sample may be peripheral blood drawn from a subject with cancer. In some aspects, the biological sample comprises a plurality of cells. In certain aspects, the biological sample comprises fresh or frozen tissue. In specific aspects, the biological sample comprises formalin fixed, paraffin embedded tissue. In some aspects, the biological sample is a tissue biopsy, fine needle aspirate, blood, serum, plasma, cerebral spinal fluid, urine, stool, saliva, circulating tumor cells, exosomes, or aspirates and bodily secretions, such as sweat. In some aspects, the biological sample contains cell-free DNA.
VII. Kits
[00220] In various aspects of the embodiments, a kit is envisioned containing therapeutic agents and/or other therapeutic and delivery agents. In some embodiments, a kit is provided for preparing and/or administering a therapy of the embodiments. The kit may comprise one or more sealed vials containing any of the pharmaceutical compositions of the present embodiments. The kit may include, for example, at least one SARS-CoV-2 spike protein antibody or SARS-CoV-2 spike protein- specific CAR construct, as well as reagents to prepare, formulate, and/or administer the components of the embodiments or perform one or more steps of the inventive methods. In some embodiments, the kit may also comprise a suitable container, which is a container that will not react with components of the kit, such as an eppendorf tube, an assay plate, a syringe, a bottle, or a tube. The container may be made from sterilizable materials such as plastic or glass.
[00221] In still further embodiments, the present disclosure concerns immunodetection kits for use with the immunodetection methods described above. As the antibodies may be used to detect SARS-CoV-2 or SARS-CoV-2 antigens, the antibodies may be included in the kit. The immunodetection kits will thus comprise, in suitable container means, a first antibody that binds to SARS-CoV-2 or SARS-CoV-2 antigen, and optionally an immunodetection reagent.
[00222] In certain embodiments, the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein antibody may be pre-bound to a solid support, such as a column matrix and/or well of a microtiter plate. The immunodetection reagents of the kit may take any one of a variety of forms, including those detectable labels that are associated with or linked to the given antibody. Detectable labels that are associated with or attached to a secondary binding ligand are also contemplated. Exemplary secondary ligands are those secondary antibodies that have binding affinity for the first antibody.
[00223] Further suitable immunodetection reagents for use in the present kits include the two-component reagent that comprises a secondary antibody that has binding affinity for the first antibody, along with a third antibody that has binding affinity for the second antibody, the third antibody being linked to a detectable label. As noted above, a number of exemplary labels are known in the art and all such labels may be employed in connection with the present disclosure.
[00224] The kits may further comprise a suitably aliquoted composition of the SARS-CoV-2 or SARS-CoV-2 antigens, whether labeled or unlabeled, as may be used to prepare a standard curve for a detection assay. The kits may contain antibody-label conjugates either in fully conjugated form, in the form of intermediates, or as separate moieties to be conjugated by the user of the kit. The components of the kits may be packaged either in aqueous media or in lyophilized form. [00225] The kit may further include an instruction sheet that outlines the procedural steps of the methods set forth herein, and will follow substantially the same procedures as described herein or are known to those of ordinary skill in the art. The instruction information may be in a computer readable media containing machine-readable instructions that, when executed using a computer, cause the display of a real or virtual procedure of delivering a pharmaceutically effective amount of a therapeutic agent.
VIII. Examples
[00226] The following examples are included to demonstrate preferred embodiments of the invention. It should be appreciated by those of skill in the art that the techniques disclosed in the examples which follow represent techniques discovered by the inventor to function well in the practice of the invention, and thus can be considered to constitute preferred modes for its practice. However, those of skill in the art should, in light of the present disclosure, appreciate that many changes can be made in the specific embodiments which are disclosed and still obtain a like or similar result without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.
Materials & Methods
[00227] Austin cohort and collection of peripheral blood. All of the SARS- CoV-2 immune plasmas used for this study were collected from individuals who presented with symptomatic disease, including serious illness that required hospitalization for one of the study subjects. Whole blood was collected from convalescent COVID-19 subjects while they were quarantined at home. Study Subjects Pl and P2 blood draws occurred at days 12 and 56 post-onset of symptoms; Subject P3 at day 11; Subject P4 at days 19 and 45. Plasma and PBMCs were separated and collected by density gradient centrifugation using Histopaque-1077 media (Sigma-Aldrich).
[00228] Expression and purification of SARS-CoV-2 proteins. The cloning, expression, and purification of the prefusion-stabilized spike ectodomain (S-ECD; GenBank: MN908947) encoding residues 1-1208 and containing two proline substitutions at 986 and 987 as well as other modifications, and residues 319-591 encoding the receptor binding domain (RBD), have been previously described (Wrapp et al., 2020). [00229] ELISA. The methods for enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay to measure titers of anti-SARS-CoV-2 IgG plasma antibodies have been previously described (Salazar et al., 2020). For determination of mAb domain-level reactivity against recombinant spike ECD, RBD and NTD proteins, a standard indirect ELISA was used. Costar high binding 96-well assay plates (Corning) were coated with antigens (4 pg ml 1) in PBS. Antigens included in-house produced SARS-COV-2 spike ECD (Wrapp et al., 2020) (S- ECD), SARS-COV-2 spike RBD, as well as commercially obtained SARS-COV-2 spike NTD (Sino Biological). Antigen-reactive mAbs were detected with goat anti-human IgG (Fab)-horseradish peroxidase (Sigma- Aldrich) conjugate in 1:5000 PBS. After washing with PBST-0.1%, the bound antibody was detected with 3,3',5,5'-tetramethylbenzidine soluble substrate (TMB; Millipore) using a Synergy Hl Microplate Reader (BioTek Instruments, Inc.).
[00230] VH repertoire sequencing. PBMCs were lysed in TRIzol Reagent (Invitrogen) and total RNA was extracted using RNeasy (Qiagen). First strand cDNA was synthesized from 500 ng mRNA using SuperScript IV (Invitrogen), and cDNA encoding the VH regions of the IgG, IgA, and IgM repertoires was amplified with a multiplex primer set (Ippolito et al., 2012) using the FastStart High Fidelity PCR System (Roche) under the following conditions: 2 min at 95 °C; 4 cycles of 92 °C for 30 s, 50 °C for 30 s, 72 °C for 1 min; 4 cycles of 92 °C for 30 s, 55 °C for 30 s, 72 °C for 1 min; 22 cycles of 92 °C for 30 s, 63 °C for 30 s, 72 °C for 1 min; 72 °C for 7 min; hold at 4 °C, as previously described (Ippolito et al., 2012). Products were sequenced by 2x300 paired-end Illumina MiSeq.
[00231] Paired VH:VL repertoire sequencing. PBMCs were co-emulsified with oligo d(T)25 magnetic beads (New England Biolabs) in lysis buffer (lOOmM Tris pH 7.5, 500mM LiCl, lOmM EDTA,1% lithium dodecyl sulfate, and 5mM dithiothreitol) using a custom flow-focusing device as previously described (McDaniel et al., 2016). The magnetic beads were washed, resuspended in a one-step RT-PCR solution with an overlap extension VH and VL primer set as previously described (McDaniel et al., 2016), and emulsified using a dispersion tube (IKA), and subjected to overlap-extension RT-PCR under the following conditions: 30 min at 55 °C followed by 2 min at 94 °C; 4 cycles of 94 °C for 30 s, 50 °C for 30 s, 72 °C for 2 min; 4 cycles of 94 °C for 30 s, 55 °C for 30 s, 72 °C for 2 min; 32 cycles of 94 °C for 30 s, 60 °C for 30 s, 72 °C for 2 min; 72 °C for 7 min; hold at 4 °C. Amplicons were extracted from the emulsions, further amplified using a nested PCR, and sequenced using 2x300 paired-end Illumina MiSeq.
[00232] Ig-seq sample preparation and mass spectrometry. Total IgG was isolated from 1 mL plasma using Protein G Plus Agarose (Pierce Thermo Fisher Scientific) affinity chromatography and cleaved into F(ab’)2 fragments using IdeS. SARS-COV-2 Spike -specific F(ab’)2 was isolated by affinity chromatography using recombinant antigen (1 mg SARS-CoV-2 S-2P or RBD) coupled to 0.05 mg dry NHS-activated agarose resin (Thermo Fisher Scientific) as follows. F(ab’)2 (10 mg/mL in PBS) was rotated with antigen-conjugated affinity resin for 1 hour, loaded into 0.5 mL spin columns, washed 12X with 0.4 mL Dulbecco’s PBS, and eluted with 0.5 mL fractions of 1% formic acid. IgG-containing elution fractions were concentrated to dryness in a speed-vac, resuspended in ddfbO, combined, neutralized with 1 M Tris / 3 M NaOH, and prepared for liquid chromatography-tandem mass spectrometry (LC-MS/MS) as described previously.
[00233] Bioinformatic Analysis. Raw Illumina MiSeq output sequences were trimmed according to sequence quality using Trimmomatic (Bolger et al., 2014) and annotated using MiXCR (Bolotin et al., 2015). Sequences with > 2 reads were clustered into clonal lineages defined by 90% CDRH3 amino acid identity using USEARCH (Edgar, 2010). LC-MS/MS search databases were prepared as previously described (Lavinder et al., 2014), using custom Python scripts (available upon request). MS searches, and MS data analyses were performed as previously described (Lavinder et al., 2014), adjusting the stringency of the elution XIC:flowthrough XIC filter to 2:1.
[00234] Antibody expression and purification. Cognate VH and VL antibody sequences of interest were ordered as gBlocks (Integrated DNA Technologies) and cloned into a customized pcDNA 3.4 vector containing a human IgGl Fc region. VH and VL plasmids were mixed at 1:2 ratio and were transfected into Expi293F cells (Thermo Fisher Scientific), which were cultured at 37 °C and 8% CO2 for 5 days, then neutralized and centrifuged at 1000 x g for 10 min. Antibodies was isolated from filtered supernatants using Protein G Plus Agarose (Pierce Thermo Fisher Scientific) affinity chromatography, washed with 20 column volumes of PBS, eluted with 100 mM glycine-HCl pH 2.5, and neutralized with 1 M Tris-HCl pH 8.0. The antibodies were buffer-exchanged into PBS and concentrated using 10,000 MWCO Vivaspin centrifugal spin columns (Sartorius). [00235] Binding affinity and checkerboard competition by biolayer interferometry. Bio-Layer interferometry (BLI) assays were performed using an 8-channel Octet RED96e instrument (ForteBio) at 25 °C with shaking at 1,000 r.p.m. To generate Fab fragments, 500 pg monoclonal antibody was incubated with 500 units Kgp (GingisKHAN; Genovis) under reducing conditions at 37 °C for 1.5 hours. Fab fragments were isolated using CaptureSelect IgG-CHl Affinity Matrix (Thermo Scientific), washed with 10 column volumes of PBS, eluted with 100 mM glycine-HCl pH 2.5, and neutralized with 1 M Tris- HC1 pH 8.0. Fab fragments were buffer-exchanged into PBS using 3K MWCO Amicon Ultra 0.5 mL Centrifugal Filters (MilliporeSigma). To determine NTD binding epitopes, BLI assays were performed as previously described. Briefly, the checkerboard experiment was performed with Anti-hlgG Fc Capture (AHC) Biosensors (ForteBio Inc., 18-5060) at 25 °C with shaking at 1,000 rpm. The first antibody was captured at 40 pg/ml for lOmin and blocked with 50 pg/ml IgG isotype control for 5min. The antigen (NTD, lOOpg/ml) was associated for 5min and the 40 pg/ml of second antibody were associated for 5 min. The ForteBio Octet Data analysis software was used for all analyses.
[00236] SARS-CoV-2 Microneutralization Assay. USAMRIID: ATCC Vero- E6 cells were seeded on 96- well plates 24-hours prior to infection. MAbs were normalized, 3- fold serially diluted, and incubated with a pre-titrated amount of SARS-CoV-2 virus (SARS- CoV-2/MT020880.1 isolate) at 37 °C for 1 hr. The virus-antibody inoculum was added to the Vero E6 monolayers and incubated for 24 hrs. Cells were then formalin fixed, permeabilized, and stained with a SARS-CoV nucleocapsid-specific antibody. After counterstaining, the monolayer was imaged under immunofluorescence software analyzed to quantify the presence of the detected antigen.
[00237] Evaluation of inAb prophylactic efficacy in the MAIO mouse model. For the inhibition of SARS-CoV-2 in the standard laboratory BALB/c mouse model, a pathogenic mouse ACE2-adapted SARS-CoV-2 variant, MAIO, was constructed previously (Leist et al., 2020; Hou et al., 2020). At 12h before infection, twelve-month-old female BALB/c mice (n=5/group) were injected intraperitoneally with 200pg/mouse of mAb or PBS. The mice were infected intranasally with a lethal dose (105 or 104 PFU) of the MAIO virus. Body weight of individual mice was measured daily, and all the mice were euthanized at day 4 post-infection by isoflurane overdose. The right caudal lung lobe was harvested and preserved in PBS at -80°C. Viral titers in the lung tissue were measured by plaque assay on Vero E6 cells.
[00238] Negative stain electron microscopy (nsEM) and cryoelectron microscopy (cryo-EM).
[00239] Statistics. GraphPad Prism version 9.0.0 (GraphPad Software Inc., La Jolla, CA, USA) was used to conduct statistical analyses. Non-parametric Mann-Whitney U test and analysis of variance on ranks (Kruskal-Wallis H test) were used to determine the statistical significance of population means between two or more groups, respectively. Statistical differences in MAIO mouse modeling were tested using a one-way ANOVA with Dunnet’s multiple comparisons test, comparing every group with the mock-challenge lung titers.
Example 1 - Cohort & Methodology
[00240] Blood was collected from four seroconverted convalescent study subjects with PCR-confirmed SARS-CoV-2 infections who experienced mild to moderate CO VID- 19 disease between days 11-19 post-onset of symptoms at which point plasma virusneutralizing titers (IDsos) with authentic SARS-CoV-2 USA-WA1/2020 ranged from <1:10 to approximately 1:285 (FIG. 5). The lineage composition and relative abundance of IgG antibodies comprising the plasma response to either intact stabilized S-ECD (S-2P; Wrapp et al., 2020) or RBD was determined using the Ig-seq pipeline (Lavinder et al., 2015; Lavinder et al., 2014; Ippolito et al., 2012; McDaniel et al., 2016; U.S. Pat. 9,146,241) that integrates LC-MS/MS proteomics of affinity chromatography-enriched IgG antibodies with peripheral B-cell heavy-chain (VH), light-chain (VL), and single B-cell VH:VL variable region repertoires (BCR-seq; U.S. Pat. 9,708,654) (FIG. 1A).
Example 2 - Plasma IgG repertoire composition and function
[00241] To analyze the composition of the polyclonal IgG response directed against the S glycoprotein in convalescent plasma, differential pulldowns were performed to fractionate S-ECD-directed versus RBD-directed antibody repertoires (FIG. 1A). Antibody lineages detected by Ig-seq in the S-ECD affinity chromatography eluant but absent from the RBD eluant were deemed to be reactive with S epitopes outside the RBD. In ELISA assays plasma IgG binding to S-ECD and to S-ECD ARBD was statistically similar (p>0.05), and a minimal drop in binding signal to S-ECD was similarly observed in the saturating presence of ~1.7 pM purified RBD as competitor (FIG. IB). Molecular-level serology using Ig-seq confirmed this observation (FIGS. 1C and 6) and further revealed across the cohort that, on average, 84% of the response to S-ECD bound to epitopes outside the RBD. In all subjects, the detected plasma IgG repertoire to S-ECD was oligoclonal comprising between only 6-22 lineages, with the top-ranked lineage comprising between 15-50% abundance of the entire repertoire (integrated LC-MS/MS XIC intensity). Furthermore, in all four subjects the topmost abundant plasma IgG lineage was directed to epitopes in S-ECD outside the RBD (FIGS. ID and 6). These patterns were uniformly observed across all the study subjects irrespective of differences in virus -neutralizing titer (FIG. 5) or S-binding titer (FIG. IB). Earlier studies had estimated that the Ig-Seq pipeline typically captures >70% of the circulating virus-specific antibody repertoire, which can increase to >85% identification for the most abundant lineages (Fee et al., 2019).
[00242] In subject P3, whose disease resolved within two days post-onset of symptoms and had the lowest plasma neutralizing titers (FIG. 5), six IgG lineages binding to S-ECD were detected (FIG. ID). Furthermore, only four of the lineages (Lin.l-Lin.4) were detectable at levels >5% abundance of the total S-ECD repertoire. Of these, the top two IgG lineages when combined accounted for >70% of the total S-ECD response. For each of these top two plasma IgG lineages (Ein.l and Ein.2), abundant intra- lineage diversity was detected, with 22 and 11 unique complementarity determining region H3 (CDR-H3) peptides mapping to each lineage, respectively (FIG. 7) indicative of somatic hypermutation and clonal expansion. In total, Ein.l-Ein.4 accounted for 93.5% abundance by integrated XIC intensity suggesting that they overwhelmingly account for the detectable S-ECD plasma repertoire.
[00243] Analysis of monoclonal antibodies (mAbs) CM29-CM32 representing the most expanded clones within each of Lin.l-Lin.4 lineages showed by ELISA and biolayer interferometry (BLI) that CM29 (Lin.l) recognizes the S2 subunit (KD = 6.6 nM), CM30 and CM31 (Lin.2 and Lin.3 with KD = 0.8 and 37.7 nM, respectively) were specific for the NTD, and CM32 (Lin.4 KD = 6.0 nM) bound the RBD, as expected from the Ig-seq differential affinity-chromatography pulldowns (FIGS. ID and Table 4). The anti-NTD antibody CM30 was capable of potently neutralizing authentic SARS-CoV-2 (IC50 0.83 pg ml 1) with the anti-RBD CM32 being slightly less potent (2.1 pg ml 1) while CM29 and CM31 showed very low or no neutralization activity (FIG. IE). The S2-directed antibody
CM29 cross-reacts with the beta-coronaviruses OC43 and HKU1.
Table 4: Recombinant plasma mAb binding and functionality
Figure imgf000080_0001
[00244] The capacity of mAbs CM29-CM32, singly and in combination, to confer prophylactic protection to live virus challenge was determined using the MAIO mouse model (Leist et al., 2020; Dinnon et al., 2020). This SARS-CoV-2 model exhibits the spectrum of morbidity and mortality of CO VID- 19 disease as well as aspects of host age, cellular tropisms, and loss of pulmonary function. Even though the RBD-directed mAh CM32 was potently effective for live-virus neutralization in vitro and it had high ADCP activity relative to the other plasma mAbs from this subject (FIG. 8) it did not confer protection in vivo in mice challenged with a low-dose infection (103 plaque forming units (PFU)) nor did it reduce lung titers (FIG. 9A). Similarly, no protection was observed with S2- directed, non-neutralizing CM29 although a statistically significant -1.5 logic reduction in viral lung titers was observed (p<0.0001), an effect that may be related to its moderately high ADCP activity (FIG. 8). CM30, derived from the top-ranking NTD-targeting IgG lineage (21% abundance), was the sole plasma mAb (among those lineages detected at >5% of the S- ECD response) that conferred complete protection both in low MAIO viral load (FIG. 9A) and, most notably, with high viral load challenge (105 PFU/mouse) (FIGS. IF, 1G, and 9B). Interestingly, administration of the non-neutralizing anti-NTD plasma mAb CM31 conferred no protection and resulted in increased lung titers which however did not reach statistical significance (mean increase: 11 -fold, =.08). Administration of a cocktail comprising the top non-RBD plasma mAbs CM29-CM31, which collectively represented >85% of the IgG plasma lineages to S-ECD (FIG. IB), showed complete protection and lung viral titers below LOD in high viral load challenge. Combined, the protection data suggest that the presence of a single potent plasma non-RBD mAb is sufficient to counter the effect of other subprotective IgG antibodies in polyclonal plasma.
Example 3 - Prevalent IgG antibodies target non-RBD epitope
[00245] In subject P2, whose illness was more severe and protracted compared to subject P3, displayed a more polyclonal IgG response (FIG. 2A) yet 12/15 lineages comprising the S-ECD repertoire bound to S-ECD non-RBD epitopes and accounted for >80% of the repertoire. This estimate was validated by analysis of the fine specificity of individually cloned recombinant plasma mAbs for 8/15 of these lineages for which we had paired VH:VL mAh sequence data, including all those detected at >5% abundance (collectively accounting for >75% of the response) (FIG. 2A). Interestingly, as with P3, the most abundant S-ECD plasma antibodies target the S2 subunit, with the four topmost lineages (68% total abundance) binding to S2. Broadly reactive functional antibody responses against S-ECD, but not RBD, have been noted to be enriched and trend with protection from primary disease as well as reinfection in humans and non-human primates (Atyeo et al., 2020; Chandrashekar et al., 2020). mAbs CM25 and CM17, representative of two NTD-targeting lineages each comprising -2.5% of the response at day 56 (Ig-seq Lin.6 and Lin.9; FIG. 2A), were both encoded by germline or near-germline IGHV1-24. An additional NTD-targeting IGHV1-24 plasma mAb (CM58) was also found in subject P4.
[00246] CM17, CM25 and CM58 bound S-ECD with nM affinities (FIG. 2B,
Table 4). All three of these plasma IGHV1-24 mAbs potently neutralized SARS-CoV-2 virus, in two independent assays using two different Vero-E6 cell sublines, with ICso 0.01, 0.03 and 0.81 pg ml’1 for CM25, CM17 and CM58 respectively (FIGS. 2C and 10, Table 4) with CM25 in particular being slightly more potent than most clinical- stage antibodies targeting the RBD (Pinto et al., 2020) (FIG. 2C). For all three mAbs, pre-administration in the MAIO mouse model resulted in significantly reduced lung viral titers at day 4 post-infection with 105 PFU of live virus (FIG. 2D; <0.001 ). At day 4 all mice in the antibody treated groups survived compared to 40% for the control group (FIG. 2E); however, animals treated with CM58 experienced significant weight loss in contrast to those treated with either CM25 or CM17 (FIG. 2F).
Example 4 - Genetic convergence of IGHV1-24 NTD antibodies
[00247] While IGHV1-24 is expressed in the B-cell repertoire of healthy individuals at a relatively low frequency (0.4%-0.8%) (Boyd et al., 2010), this gene segment has been observed to expressed be ~ 10-fold higher than expected (~5%-8%) in memory B cell and plasmablast repertoires from COVID-19 patients (Liu et al., 2020; Brouwer et al., 2020; Nielsen et al., 2020). This prompted the inventors to examine whether IGHV1-24 frequency might similarly be elevated at the serological level in COVID-19 convalescent plasma. Examination across all four study subjects detected IGHVL24 antibodies exclusively in the S-ECD affinity chromatography eluant (median 4.3%) when compared with the RBD eluant (0%) (FIGS. 3A and 3B), indicating that IGHV1-24 partitions exclusively with IgG recognition of S-ECD epitopes that lay outside the RBD (FIG. 3 A). Notably IGHV1-24 antibodies likely recognizing unrelated antigens were detected in the non-binding flow- through chromatography fraction, albeit at lower frequency (FIG. 3B). While most IGHV1- 24 plasma antibodies detected in COVID- 19 convalescent plasmas bind to S-ECD, in contrast, serological responses directed against the related class I viral membrane fusion (spike) proteins of influenza and respiratory syncytial virus are not enriched for IGHVL24 (FIG. 3B).
[00248] Multiple alignment (FIG. 3C) of the plasma mAbs CM17, CM25 and CM58 with four recently reported neutralizing IGHV1-24 anti-NTD mAbs cloned from peripheral B cells (4A8 (Chi et al., 2020), 1-68 (Liu et al., 2020), 1-87 (Liu et al., 2020), COVA2-37 (Brouwer et al., 2020)) and an additional antibody (COV2-2199; Zost et al., 2020) for which no neutralization data had been reported, identified a pattern of highly similar VH immune receptor sequences (FIG. 3D). The VH region of all 8 mAbs exhibits zero or low somatic mutation (nucleotide identities 97-100%). In all cases, three glutamate (E) residues (E36, E59, E80; IMGT numbering (Lefranc & Lefranc, 2020) located in CDR-H1, CDR-H2 and framework H3 (FWR-H3), respectively, as well as a phenylalanine (F) residue (F56) in CDR-H2, are invariably unmutated; these exact residues at these precise positions are unique to IGHV1-24, which occurs as a single nonpolymorphic allele among the 129 IGHV genes and alleles residing in the human genome. Residues E36, E59, and E80 occur in fewer than 1%, 2%, and 1% of 87,838 human antibody heavy chains, while F56 occurs in fewer than 1.2% (Swindells et al., 2017). CDR-H3 peptide intervals are restricted to lengths of only 14 or 21 amino acids and contain a key dipeptide motif near the amino terminus: an AV hydrophobic patch (Table 5). Despite these constraints on the heavy chain, six different light chains are observed (Table 5) suggesting a minor role for the VL domain for NTD binding activity or specificity. A “checkerboard” binding-competition experiment (FIG. 3D) indicated the presence of at least two epitope clusters on the NTD, including one targeted by all of the tested IGHV1-24 mAbs (4A8, CM25, CM17, CM58, and 1-68), and the IGHV3-11 mAb CM30. Within this epitope cluster, particularly strong levels of competition were seen among CM17, CM25, CM58, and 4A8 (FIG. 3D, dashed box). Another NTD epitope is identified by CM31 (IGHV2-5, 6.4% mutation), which demonstrates overlap with CM30 (IGHV3-11; 3.1% mutation), CM58, and 1-68 but does not compete with the other three IGHV1-24 NTD mAbs. Interestingly, CM31 instead shows low-level competition with the RBD-specific mAb CM32.
Table 5: Convergent NTD mAbs
Figure imgf000083_0001
°Zost et al. (2020); *This study; ^Brouwer et al. (2020); *Liu et al. (2020); #Chi et al. (2020)
Example 5 - Structural convergence of IGHV1-24 NTD antibodies
[00249] To better understand the IGHV1-24 NTD-reactive antibody interactions with the spike, a cryo-EM structure of CM25 bound to S-ECD was determined at an overall resolution of 3.3 A (FIG. 4A). Three CM25 Fabs were bound to each trimeric S- ECD protein via interactions with the NTD, but the flexibility of the NTD relative to the rest of the spike resulted in poor density for the CM25 interface. Focused refinement of the NTD- CM25 region was performed to improve map quality, enabling building and analysis of the binding interface. The structure revealed a heavy-chain-dominant mode of binding, with substantial contacts mediated by interactions between the three CDRs and the N3 and N5 loops of the NTD (FIG. 4B). A minor light chain contact is formed through a CH/pi interaction between CDR-L2 Tyr55 and Pro251 within the N5 loop. CDR-H1 interacts extensively through hydrogen bonds and hydrophobic interactions, including a salt bridge formed between the conserved Glu36 residue and the N5 loop residue Arg246 (FIG. 4C). As IGHV1-24 is highly electronegative (pl = 4.57), electrostatic interactions might be expected to guide the initial antibody-NTD association through steering and the formation of salt bridges and hydrogen bonds. The common IGHV1-24 Phe56 residue in CDR-H2 forms a pi- cation interaction with Lysl47 in the N3 loop (FIG. 4C). CM25 contains a 14-amino-acid CDR-H3 loop, including the AV aliphatic motif found in all but one of the convergent IGHV1-24 NTD-binding mAbs. Alal09 and Vail 10 are buried at the interface in a binding pocket framed by the N3 and N5 loops. The one extant structure of an IGHV1-24 NTD- binding antibody isolated by B-cell cloning was recently determined for mAb 4A83. A comparison of the two structures reveals that the AV dipeptide interaction is structurally conserved, and the 21 amino-acid CDR-H3 of 4A8 extends along the outside of the NTD without adding additional binding contacts (FIG. 4D). Both structures show extensive contacts between the heavy chain of the Fabs and the N3 and N5 loops of the NTD. Notably, the Glu36 - Arg246 salt bridge and an identical CDR-H2 contact between Phe56 and Lysl47 are also observed at the 4A8-NTD interface.
* * *
[00250] All of the methods disclosed and claimed herein can be made and executed without undue experimentation in light of the present disclosure. While the compositions and methods of this invention have been described in terms of preferred embodiments, it will be apparent to those of skill in the art that variations may be applied to the methods and in the steps or in the sequence of steps of the method described herein without departing from the concept, spirit and scope of the invention. More specifically, it will be apparent that certain agents which are both chemically and physiologically related may be substituted for the agents described herein while the same or similar results would be achieved. All such similar substitutes and modifications apparent to those skilled in the art are deemed to be within the spirit, scope and concept of the invention as defined by the appended claims. REFERENCES
The following references, to the extent that they provide exemplary procedural or other details supplementary to those set forth herein, are specifically incorporated herein by reference.
Atyeo, C. et al. Distinct Early Serological Signatures Track with SARS-CoV-2 Survival. Immunity 53, 524-532.e524, doi:10.1016/j.immuni.2020.07.020 (2020).
Bolger, A. M., Lohse, M. & Usadel, B. Trimmomatic: a flexible trimmer for Illumina sequence data. Bioinformatics 30, 2114-2120, doi: 10.1093/bioinformatics/btul70 (2014).
Bolotin, D. A. et al. MiXCR: software for comprehensive adaptive immunity profiling. Nat Methods 12, 380-381, doi:10.1038/nmeth.3364 (2015).
Boyd, S. D. et al. Individual variation in the germline Ig gene repertoire inferred from variable region gene rearrangements. J Immunol 184, 6986-6992, doi:10.4049/jimmunol.1000445 (2010).
Brouwer, P. I. M. et al. Potent neutralizing antibodies from COVID-19 patients define multiple targets of vulnerability. Science, doi:10.1126/science.abc5902 (2020).
Cao, Y. et al. Potent Neutralizing Antibodies against SARS-CoV-2 Identified by High- Throughput Single-Cell Sequencing of Convalescent Patients’ B Cells. Cell 182, 73- 84.el6, doi: 10.1016/j.cell.2020.05.025 (2020).
Chandrashekar, A. et al. SARS-CoV-2 infection protects against rechallenge in rhesus macaques. Science 369, 812-817, doi: 10.1126/science.abc4776 (2020).
Chi, X. et al. A neutralizing human antibody binds to the N-terminal domain of the Spike protein of SARS-CoV-2. Science 369, 650-655, doi:10.1126/science.abc6952 (2020).
Corbett, K. S. et al. SARS-CoV-2 mRNA vaccine design enabled by prototype pathogen preparedness. Nature 586, 567-571, doi: 10.1038/s41586-020-2622-0 (2020).
Dinnon, K. H. et al. A mouse-adapted model of SARS-CoV-2 to test COVID-19 countermeasures. Nature 586, 560-566, doi: 10.1038/s41586-020-2708-8 (2020).
Edgar, R. C. Search and clustering orders of magnitude faster than BLAST. Bioinformatics 26, 2460-2461, doi: 10.1093/bioinformatics/btq461 (2010).
Folegatti, P. M. et al. Safety and immunogenicity of the ChAdOxl nCoV-19 vaccine against SARS-CoV-2: a preliminary report of a phase 1/2, single-blind, randomised controlled trial. Lancet 396, 467-478, doi: 10.1016/S0140-6736(20)31604-4 (2020). Hansen, J. et al. Studies in humanized mice and convalescent humans yield a SARS-CoV-2 antibody cocktail. Science 369, 1010-1014, doi:10.1126/science.abd0827 (2020).
Hou, Y. J. et al. SARS-CoV-2 Reverse Genetics Reveals a Variable Infection Gradient in the Respiratory Tract. Cell 182, 429-446.e414, doi: 10.1016/j.cell.2020.05.042 (2020).
Ippolito, G. C. et al. Antibody repertoires in humanized NOD-scid-IL2Ry(null) mice and human B cells reveals human-like diversification and tolerance checkpoints in the mouse. PLoS One 7, e35497, doi:10.1371/journal.pone.0035497 (2012).
Ju, B. et al. Human neutralizing antibodies elicited by SARS-CoV-2 infection. Nature 584, 115-119, doi: 10.1038/s41586-020-2380-z (2020).
Juno, J. A. et al. Humoral and circulating follicular helper T cell responses in recovered patients with COVID-19. Nat Med 26, 1428-1434, doi: 10.1038/s41591-020-0995-0 (2020).
Lavinder, J. J. et al. Identification and characterization of the constituent human serum antibodies elicited by vaccination. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A 111, 2259-2264, doi: 10.1073/pnas.1317793111 (2014).
Lavinder, J. J., Horton, A. P., Georgiou, G. & Ippolito, G. C. Next-generation sequencing and protein mass spectrometry for the comprehensive analysis of human cellular and serum antibody repertoires. Curr Opin Chem Biol 24, 112-120, doi:10.1016/j.cbpa.2014.11.007 (2015).
Lee, J. et al. Persistent Antibody Clonotypes Dominate the Serum Response to Influenza over Multiple Years and Repeated Vaccinations. Cell Host & Microbe 25, 367 -376.e365, doi:10.1016/j.chom.2019.01.010 (2019).
Lefranc, M. P. & Lefranc, G. Immunoglobulins or Antibodies: IMGT. Biomedicines 8, doi:10.3390/biomedicines8090319 (2020).
Leist, S. R. et al. A Mouse- Adapted SARS-CoV-2 Induces Acute Lung Injury and Mortality in Standard Laboratory Mice. Cell, doi: 10.1016/j.cell.2020.09.050 (2020).
Liu, L. et al. Potent neutralizing antibodies against multiple epitopes on SARS-CoV-2 spike. Nature 584, 450-456, doi: 10.1038/s41586-020-2571-7 (2020).
Luchsinger, L. L. et al. Serological Assays Estimate Highly Variable SARS-CoV-2 Neutralizing Antibody Activity in Recovered COVID 19 Patients. medRxiv, 2020.2006.2008.20124792, doi: 10.1101/2020.06.08.20124792 (2020).
McDaniel, J. R., DeKosky, B. J., Tanno, H., Ellington, A. D. & Georgiou, G. Ultra-high- throughput sequencing of the immune receptor repertoire from millions of lymphocytes. Nat Protoc 11, 429-442, doi: 10.1038/nprot.2016.024 (2016). Mulligan, M. J. et al. Phase I/II study of COVID-19 RNA vaccine BNT162bl in adults. Nature 586, 589-593, doi: 10.1038/s41586-020-2639-4 (2020).
Nielsen, S. C. A. et al. Human B cell clonal expansion and convergent antibody responses to SARS-CoV-2. bioRxiv, doi: 10.1101/2020.07.08.194456 (2020).
Piccoli, L. et al. Mapping Neutralizing and Immunodominant Sites on the SARS-CoV-2 Spike Receptor-Binding Domain by Structure-Guided High-Resolution Serology. Cell, doi: 10.1016/j.cell.2020.09.037 (2020).
Pinto, D. et al. Cross-neutralization of SARS-CoV-2 by a human monoclonal SARS-CoV antibody. Nature 583, 290-295, doi: 10.1038/s41586-020-2349-y (2020).
Purtha, W. E., Tedder, T. F., Johnson, S., Bhattacharya, D. & Diamond, M. S. Memory B cells, but not long-lived plasma cells, possess antigen specificities for viral escape mutants. J Exp Med 208, 2599-2606, doi: 10.1084/jem.20110740 (2011).
Ripperger, T. J. et al. Detection, prevalence, and duration of humoral responses to SARS- CoV-2 under conditions of limited population exposure. medRxiv, doi: 10.1101/2020.08.14.20174490 (2020).
Robbiani, D. F. et al. Convergent antibody responses to SARS-CoV-2 in convalescent individuals. Nature, doi: 10.1038/s41586-020-2456-9 (2020).
Rogers, T. F. et al. Isolation of potent SARS-CoV-2 neutralizing antibodies and protection from disease in a small animal model. Science 369, 956-963, doi : 10.1126/science.abc7520 (2020) .
Salazar, E. et al. Treatment of Coronavirus Disease 2019 (COVID-19) Patients with Convalescent Plasma. Am J Pathol, doi: 10.1016/j.ajpath.2020.05.014 (2020).
Shi, R. et al. A human neutralizing antibody targets the receptor-binding site of SARS-CoV- 2. Nature 584, 120-124, doi: 10.1038/s41586-020-2381-y (2020).
Smith, K. G., Light, A., Nossal, G. J. & Tarlinton, D. M. The extent of affinity maturation differs between the memory and antibody-forming cell compartments in the primary immune response. EMBO J 16, 2996-3006, doi:10.1093/emboj/16.11.2996 (1997).
Swindells, M. B. et al. abYsis: Integrated Antibody Sequence and Structure-Management, Analysis, and Prediction. J Mol Biol 429, 356-364, doi:10.1016/j.jmb.2016.08.019 (2017).
Walls, A. C. et al. Structure, Function, and Antigenicity of the SARS-CoV-2 Spike Glycoprotein. Cell 181, 281-292.e286, doi:10.1016/j.cell.2020.02.058 (2020).
Wee, A. Z. et al. Broad neutralization of SARS-related viruses by human monoclonal antibodies. Science, doi:10.1126/science.abc7424 (2020). Weisblum, Y. et al. Escape from neutralizing antibodies by SARS-CoV-2 spike protein variants. bioRxiv, doi: 10.1101/2020.07.21.214759 (2020).
Wrapp, D. et al. Cryo-EM structure of the 2019-nCoV spike in the prefusion conformation. Science 367, 1260-1263, doi:10.1126/science.abb2507 (2020).
Wu, F. et al. Neutralizing antibody responses to SARS-CoV-2 in a CO VID- 19 recovered patient cohort and their implications. medRxiv, 2020.2003.2030.20047365, doi: 10.1101/2020.03.30.20047365 (2020).
Yang, J. et al. A vaccine targeting the RBD of the S protein of SARS-CoV-2 induces protective immunity. Nature 586, 572-577, doi:10.1038/s41586-020-2599-8 (2020).
Zost, S. J. et al. Potently neutralizing and protective human antibodies against SARS-CoV-2. Nature, doi: 10.1038/s41586-020-2548-6 (2020).

Claims

88 WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment, wherein the antibody or antibody fragment comprises clone-paired heavy and light chain CDR sequences derived from the clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences of Table 2.
2. The monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of claim 1, wherein the antibody or antibody fragment comprises clone-paired heavy and light chain CDR sequences from Table 1.
3. The monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of claim 1, wherein the antibody or antibody fragment comprises clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences having, independently, at least 70%, 80%, or 90% identity to sequences from Table 2.
4. The monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of claim 1, wherein the antibody or antibody fragment comprises clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences each having at least 95% identity to sequences from Table 2.
5. The monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of claim 1, wherein the antibody or antibody fragment comprises clone-paired heavy chain and light chain variable sequences from Table 2.
6. The monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of claim 1, wherein the antibody fragment is a recombinant scFv (single chain fragment variable) antibody, Fab fragment, Rab'h fragment, or Fv fragment.
7. The monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of claim 1, wherein the antibody is a chimeric antibody or a bispecific antibody.
8. The monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-7, wherein the antibody is capable of binding to SARS-CoV-2 spike protein.
9. The monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-8, wherein the antibody is an IgG antibody or a recombinant IgG antibody or antibody fragment.
10. The monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-9, wherein the antibody or antibody fragment is fused to an imaging agent. 89
11. The monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-9, wherein the antibody or antibody fragment is labeled.
12. The monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of claim 11, wherein the label is a fluorescent label, an enzymatic label, or a radioactive label.
13. A monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment, which competes for binding to the same epitope as the monoclonal antibody or an antibody fragment according to any one of claims 1-9.
14. A monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment that binds to an epitope on SARS-CoV- 2 spike protein recognized by an antibody of any one of claims 1-9.
15. An isolated nucleic acid encoding the antibody heavy and/or light chain variable region of the antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-9, 13, and 14.
16. An expression vector comprising the nucleic acid of claim 15.
17. A hybridoma or engineered cell comprising a nucleic acid encoding an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-9, 13, and 14.
18. A hybridoma or engineered cell comprising a nucleic acid of claim 15.
19. A method of making the monoclonal antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-9, 13, and 14, the method comprising culturing the hybridoma or engineered cell of claim 17 or 18 under conditions that allow expression of the antibody or antibody fragment and optionally isolating the antibody or antibody fragment from the culture.
20. A pharmaceutical formulation comprising one or more antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-14.
21. A pharmaceutical formulation comprising one or more expression vector encoding a first antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-9, 13, and 14.
22. The pharmaceutical formulation of claim 21, further comprising one or more expression vector encoding a second antibody or antibody fragment, such as a distinct antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-9, 13, and 14. 90
23. A method of reducing the likelihood of a SARS-CoV-2 infection in a patient at risk of contracting SARS-CoV-2, the method comprising delivering to the patient an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-14.
24. The method of claim 23, further characterized as a method of preventing a SARS- CoV-2 infection in the patient.
25. The method of claim 23, wherein the patient has been exposed to SARS-CoV-2.
26. The method of claim 23, wherein the antibody or antibody fragment is delivered to the patient prior to infection or after infection.
27. The method of any one of claims 23-26, wherein delivering comprises antibody or antibody fragment administration, or genetic delivery with an RNA or DNA sequence or vector encoding the antibody or antibody fragment.
28. A method of treating a patient infected with SARS-CoV-2, the method comprising delivering to the patient an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-7.
29. The method of any one of claims claim 23-28, wherein the method comprises delivering to the patient a cocktail of antibodies or antibody fragments selected from among the antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-7.
30. The method of claim 29, wherein the cocktail comprises the CM29 antibody, the CM30 antibody, and the CM32 antibody.
31. The method of claim 29 or 30, wherein the cocktail is about 50% CM29, about 20% CM30, and about 20% CM32.
32. The method of any one of claims 28-31, wherein delivering comprises antibody or antibody fragment administration, or genetic delivery with an RNA or DNA sequence or vector encoding the antibody or antibody fragment.
33. The method of any one of claims claim 28-32, wherein the method reduces the viral load in the patient.
34. A method of detecting a SARS-CoV-2 infection in a patient, the method comprising: 91
(a) contacting a sample obtained from the patient with an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-7; and
(b) detecting SARS-CoV-2 in the sample by detecting binding of the antibody or antibody fragment to a SARS-CoV-2 antigen in the sample.
35. The method of claim 34, wherein the sample is a body fluid.
36. The method of claim 34 or 35, wherein said sample is blood, sputum, tears, saliva, mucous or serum, semen, cervical or vaginal secretions, amniotic fluid, placental tissues, urine, exudate, transudate, tissue scrapings or feces.
37. The method of any one of claims 34-36, wherein detecting comprises an ELISA, RIA, lateral flow assay or Western blot.
38. The method of any one of claims 34-37, further comprising performing steps (a) and (b) a second time and determining a change in SARS-CoV-2 antigen levels as compared to the first assay.
39. A method of determining a severity of a SARS-CoV-2 infection in a patient, the method comprising performing an assay to determine an anti-SARS-CoV-2 spike protein N- terminal domain (NTD) antibody titer in a blood, plasma, or serum sample from the patient and correlating the severity of the infection based on the NTD antibody titer.
40. The method of claim 39, wherein a higher NTD antibody titer indicates a heightened immune response, and thus a less severe infection.
41. The method of claim 39 or 40, wherein the assay comprises contacting the blood, plasma, or serum sample with a SARS-CoV-2 NTD.
42. The method of claim 41, further comprising detecting a level of binding of the NTD titer to the SARS-CoV-2 NTD.
43. The method of any one of claims 39-42, wherein the titer is determined by performing an ELISA assay.
44. The method of any one of claims 39-42, wherein the titer is determined using a microneutralization assay to detect the presence of neutralizing antibodies. 92
45. The method of any one of claims 39-44, wherein the antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-7 is used as a positive control in the assay.
46. A method of predicting a neutralization activity of blood, plasma, or serum sample from a patient infected with SARS-CoV-2, the method comprising performing an assay to determine an anti-SARS-CoV-2 spike protein N-terminal domain (NTD) antibody titer in the blood, plasma, or serum sample and predicting the neutralization activity of the sample based on the NTD antibody titer.
47. The method of claim 46, wherein a higher NTD antibody titer indicates a higher neutralization activity.
48. The method of claim 46 or 47, wherein the assay comprises contacting the blood, plasma, or serum sample with a SARS-CoV-2 NTD.
49. The method of claim 48, further comprising detecting a level of binding of the NTD titer to the SARS-CoV-2 NTD.
50. The method of any one of claims 46-49, wherein the titer is determined by performing an ELISA assay.
51. The method of any one of claims 46-50, wherein the antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-7 is used as a positive control in the assay.
52. A method of predicting whether an anti-SARS-CoV-2 antibody binds to the SARS- CoV-2 spike protein N-terminal domain (NTD), the method comprising determining whether the antibody comprises (i) at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or 100% identity to IGHV1- 24, (ii) an E31 in CDR-H1, (iii) an E59 in CDR-H2, (iv) an E72 in FWR-H3, (v) an AV motif in CDR-H3, and/or (vi) an AVxnG motif in CDR-H3, where n is 1-3.
53. The method of claim 52, wherein the AVxnG motif in CDR-H3 is an AVAG motif.
54. A method of preparing a pharmaceutical formulation comprising a cocktail of antibodies or antibody fragments that bind to SARS-CoV-2 spike protein, the method comprising (i) identifying and quantifying the anti-SARS-CoV-2 spike protein antibodies present in a blood, plasma, or serum sample from a patient infected with SARS-CoV-2; (ii) determining the ratio at which each of the identified antibodies was present in the sample; 93 and (iii) preparing a pharmaceutical formulation comprising the identified antibodies at the determined ratio.
55. The method of claim 54, wherein step (i) comprises performing affinity chromatography to enrich IgG antibodies in the sample that bind to SARS-CoV-2 spike protein.
56. The method of claim 55, wherein the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein extracellular domain is used as the ligand.
57. The method of claim 55, wherein the SARS-CoV-2 spike protein receptor binding domain is used as the ligand.
58. The method of any one of claims 54-57, wherein step (i) comprises LC-MS/MS antibody profiling.
59. A pharmaceutical formulation prepared by the method of any one of claims 54-58.
60. A method of determining an antigenic integrity, correct conformation and/or correct sequence of a SARS-CoV-2 antigen, the method comprising:
(a) contacting a sample comprising the antigen with a first antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-14; and
(b) determining antigenic integrity, correct conformation and/or correct sequence of the antigen by detecting binding of the first antibody or antibody fragment to the antigen.
61. The method of claim 60, wherein the sample comprises a recombinantly produced antigen.
62. The method of claim 60, wherein the sample comprises a vaccine formulation comprising the antigen.
63. The method of any one of claims 60-62, wherein detecting comprises an ELISA, RIA, lateral flow assay or Western blot.
64. The method of any one of claims 60-63, further comprising performing steps (a) and (b) a second time to determine the antigenic stability of the antigen over time. 94
65. A method of detecting SARS-CoV-2 spike protein in an in vitro sample, the method comprising contacting the in vitro sample with an antibody or antibody fragment of any one of claims 1-14 and detecting the binding of the antibody or antibody fragment to the sample.
66. The method of claim 65, wherein the detecting is by flow cytometry, mass spectrometry, western blot, immunohistochemistry, ELISA, or RIA.
67. An antibody or antibody fragment of any of claims 1-14 or a pharmaceutical formulation of claim 20 or 59, for use in treating or preventing a SARS-CoV-2 infection in a patient.
68. Use of an antibody or antibody fragment of any of claims 1-14 or a pharmaceutical formulation of claim 20 or 59, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating or preventing a SARS-CoV-2 infection in a patient.
PCT/US2021/063493 2020-12-15 2021-12-15 Human monoclonal antibodies targeting the sars-cov-2 spike protein WO2022132887A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202063125832P 2020-12-15 2020-12-15
US63/125,832 2020-12-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022132887A1 true WO2022132887A1 (en) 2022-06-23

Family

ID=82058620

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2021/063493 WO2022132887A1 (en) 2020-12-15 2021-12-15 Human monoclonal antibodies targeting the sars-cov-2 spike protein

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2022132887A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114920834A (en) * 2020-08-11 2022-08-19 优睿赛思(武汉)生物科技有限公司 Monoclonal antibody of anti SARS-CoV-2 spike protein S1 and its application

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030059937A1 (en) * 2000-06-16 2003-03-27 Ruben Steven M. Antibodies that immunospecifically bind BLyS
WO2020142626A1 (en) * 2019-01-04 2020-07-09 Gigagen, Inc. Anti-ox40 binding proteins and methods of use thereof
US10787501B1 (en) * 2020-04-02 2020-09-29 Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Anti-SARS-CoV-2-spike glycoprotein antibodies and antigen-binding fragments

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030059937A1 (en) * 2000-06-16 2003-03-27 Ruben Steven M. Antibodies that immunospecifically bind BLyS
WO2020142626A1 (en) * 2019-01-04 2020-07-09 Gigagen, Inc. Anti-ox40 binding proteins and methods of use thereof
US10787501B1 (en) * 2020-04-02 2020-09-29 Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Anti-SARS-CoV-2-spike glycoprotein antibodies and antigen-binding fragments

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114920834A (en) * 2020-08-11 2022-08-19 优睿赛思(武汉)生物科技有限公司 Monoclonal antibody of anti SARS-CoV-2 spike protein S1 and its application

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR20230028453A (en) CCR8 Antibodies for Therapeutic Uses
JP2021152040A (en) Novel anti-ctla4 antibodies
US20210277092A1 (en) HUMAN MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES TO SEVERE ACUTE RESPIRATORY SYNDROME CORONAVIRUS 2 (SARS-CoV-2)
KR102176962B1 (en) Methods for increasing immunoglobulin a levels
WO2021195326A1 (en) Human monoclonal antibodies to severe acute respiratory syndrome coronavirus 2 (sars-cov-2)
US20240327503A1 (en) Sars-cov-2 neutralizing antibodies and uses thereof
US20220389106A1 (en) Anti-epha10 antibodies and methods of use thereof
CN114075289A (en) anti-CD 73 antibodies and uses thereof
WO2021195385A1 (en) HUMAN MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES TO SEVERE ACUTE RESPIRATORY SYNDROME CORONAVIRUS 2 (SARS-GoV-2)
WO2022150740A1 (en) Cross-reactive antibodies recognizing the coronavirus spike s2 domain
US20230014398A1 (en) Anti-b7-h3 monoclonal antibody and methods of use thereof
WO2022132887A1 (en) Human monoclonal antibodies targeting the sars-cov-2 spike protein
CN113412130A (en) Identification and targeting of pro-tumor cancer-associated fibroblasts for diagnosis and treatment of cancer and other diseases
WO2021242961A1 (en) Human monoclonal antibodies to venezuelan equine encephalitis virus and uses therefor
WO2023159061A2 (en) Human monoclonal antibodies targeting the s2 subunit of the sars-cov-2 spike protein
US20240294611A1 (en) Cross-reactive antibodies recognizing the coronavirus spike s2 domain
US20230085393A1 (en) Human antibodies that neutralize zika virus and methods of use therefor
US20240085427A1 (en) AN AGR2Xcd3 BISPECIFIC ENGAGER FOR THE TREATMENT OF CANCER
US20240288426A1 (en) Human antibodies to crimean congo hemorrhagic fever virus
WO2024196463A2 (en) Broadly neutralizing human monoclonal antibodies that target the sars-cov-2 receptor binding domain (rbd)
US20220280618A1 (en) Antibodies to candida and uses thereof
JP2023523890A (en) Monoclonal antibodies targeting HSP70 and their therapeutic uses
CN115916821A (en) Compositions and methods for vaccination and treatment of infectious diseases
WO2023235666A2 (en) Human antibodies to bordetella pertussis and uses therefor
WO2024015760A2 (en) Human monoclonal antibodies to omicron variant of severe acute respiratory syndrome coronavirus 2 (sars-cov- 2)

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21907694

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21907694

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1